747921

Futaba FX22 Manual

42
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/174
Next page
Instruction Manual
1M23Z03702
Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq
Entire Contents © 2013
INTRODUCTION............................................... 4
Ɣ6upportaQG6HrYLcH......................................... 4
Ɣ$ppOLcatLoQ([portaQG0oGL¿catLoQ........... 5
ƔDH¿QLtLoQVof6\mboOV...................................... 6
Ɣ6afHt\3rHcautLoQVGoQotopHratHwLthout
rHaGLQJ............................................................. 6
%()OR(U6(................................................... 10
Ɣ)HaturHVof);-.......................................... 10
ƔCoQtHQtVaQGtHchQLcaOVpHc
L¿catLoQV........... 11
Ɣ$ccHVVorLHV....................................................... 1
ƔTraQVmLttHrcoQtroOV....................................... 13
CautLoQVoQhaQGOLQJaQtHQQa...................... 14
/(DmoQLtor................................................... 14
6wLtch6$-6+............................................... 15
Rotar\trLmT1-T4....................................... 15
/LQHarVOLGHr/6R6..................................... 15
9oOumH/DRD............................................ 15
+omH/([LtU.mHQu/0oQ.%utto
Q................. 15
TouchVHQVor................................................... 16
6tLcNaGMuVtmHQt............................................. 17
6DcarG............................................................ 18
+owtorHmoYHarHarcaVH............................ 19
CoQQHctor/3OuJ............................................... 0
IQVtaOOatLoQaQGrHmoYaOofthHbattHr\........ 0
TraQVmLttHrtra\............................................. 1
ƔRHcHLYHrQ
omHQcOaturH................................... 
ƔR70086%C+moGH......................................... 3
ƔRHcHLYHrVaQtHQQaLQVtaOOatLoQ...................... 4
Ɣ6afHt\prHcautLoQVwhHQLQVtaOOLQJVHrYoV... 5
Ɣ6.%U6/6.%U6IQVtaOOatLoQ............................ 6
Ɣ6.%U6:LrLQJH[ampOH................................... 7
Ɣ6.%U66\V
tHm................................................ 8
Ɣ6.%U6/6.%U6DHYLcHVHttLQJ......................... 9
ƔTHOHmHtr\6\VtHm............................................ 30
%$6ICO3(R$TION....................................... 31
Ɣ%attHr\CharJLQJ............................................ 31
+owtocharJHthH%attHr\............................. 31
Ɣ+owtoturQON/O))thHtraQVmLttHr.......... 3
:hHQturQLQJoQ............................................ 3
:hHQturQLQJoff............................................ 3
ƔRHJLVtratLoQofthHuVHrVQamH..................... 3
Ɣ+omHVcrHHQ.................................................... 33
ƔUVHrmHQu........................................................ 34
Ɣ/LQNprocHGurH);
-/R70086%................ 35
ƔRaQJHtHVtLQJ\ourR/CV\VtHm...................... 37
R(C(I9(R$ND6(R9OIN6T$//$TION 38
RHcHLYHraQGVHrYoVcoQQHctLoQ.................... 38
6HrYocoQQHctLoQb\moGHOt\pH................... 39
$LrpOaQH/*OLGHr.............................................. 39
+HOLcoptHr........................................................ 41
0OD(/%$6IC6(TTIN
*3ROC(DUR(... 4
$LrpOaQH/*OLGHr.............................................. 4
+HOLcoptHr........................................................ 44
)UNCTION6O)6<6T(00(NU................ 48
TraLQHr............................................................. 49
DLVpOa\............................................................. 5
UVHrNamH....................................................... 53
6ouQG............................................................... 54
+/:6HttLQJ..................................................... 55
6tart6(/........................................................ 57
$uto/ocN........................................................ 60
IQformatLoQ.................................................... 61
6.%U66HrYo................................................... 6
)UNCTION6O)/IN.$*(0(
NU............. 65
6HrYo0oQLtor................................................. 66
0oGHO6HOHct.................................................... 67
0oGHOT\pH...................................................... 69
T$%/(O)CONT(NT6
6\VtHm............................................................ 71
)uQctLoQ.......................................................... 74
6ub-TrLm......................................................... 76
6HrYoRHYHrVH................................................. 77
)aLO6afH........................................................... 78
(QG3oLQt........................................................ 79
6HrYo6pHHG..................................................... 80
ThrottOHCut$Lr/+HOLoQO\.......................... 81
IGOHDowQ$LroQO\...................................... 8
6waVhRLQJ+HOLoQO\.................................. 83
6waVh+HOLoQO\H[cHpt+-1........................ 84
T1-T46HttLQJ.................................................. 87
:arQLQJ
........................................................... 88
THOHm.6Ht6pHHch......................................... 89
THOHmHtr\......................................................... 90
THOHmHtr\0oQLtor......................................... 91
THOHmHtr\:rHcHLYHr>battHr\@......................... 9
THOHmHtr\:rHcHLYHr>H[t-batt@......................... 93
THOHmHtr\:tHmpHraturH.................................. 94
THOHmHtr\:rpmVHQVor.................................... 95
THOHmHtr\:aOtLtuGH.......................................... 96
T
HOHmHtr\:aOtLtuGH>YarLomHtHr@.................... 97
THOHmHtr\:YoOtaJH>battHr\@........................... 98
THOHmHtr\:*36>GLVtaQcH@.............................. 99
THOHmHtr\:*36>VpHHG@................................ 101
THOHmHtr\:currHQt>
currHQtYoOtaJHcapacLt\
@.... 10
6HQVor............................................................ 103
6HQVor:rHOoaG................................................ 104
6HQVor:rHJLVtHr.............................................. 104
6HQVor:rHOocatH............................................. 105
6HQVor:VHtVOot............................................... 105
DataRHVHt..................................................... 106
)UNCTION6O)0OD(/0(NU............... 107
ƔCommoQ)uQctLoQV...................................... 107
CoQGLtLoQ..................................................... 108
DuaORatH...................................................... 110
3roJram0L[................................................. 11
)uHO0L[........................................................ 114
Ɣ$LrpOaQH/*OLGHr)uQctLoQV........................... 116
3LtCurYH....................................................... 118
T+RCurYH................................................... 119
T+RDHOa\.................................................... 10
$I/DLffHrHQtLaO............................................ 11
)Oap6HttLQJ................................................... 1
$I/toCambHr)/3..................................... 13
$I/to%raNH)/3......................................... 14
$I/toRUD................................................... 15
RUDto$I/................................................... 16
CambHr0L[.................................................. 18
(/(toCambHr
............................................ 130
CambHr)/3to(/(.................................... 131
%uttHrÀ\........................................................ 13
TrLm0L[....................................................... 134
$LrbraNH$LrpOaQHoQO\............................. 136
*\rofor*<$t\pHJ\ro............................ 138
9-taLO.............................................................. 140
$LOHYator........................................................ 141
:LQJOHt.......................................................... 14
0otor............................................................. 143
RUDto(/(.................................................. 145
6QapRoOO$LrpOaQHoQO\............................ 146
Ɣ+HOLcoptHr)uQctLoQV.................................... 148
3ITCurYH/3LttrLm
....................................... 149
T+RCurYH/ThrottOHhoYHrtrLm................. 15
ThrottOH+oOG................................................ 155
6waVh0L[..................................................... 156
ThrottOH0L[.................................................. 157
3ITtoRUDRHYoOutLoQmL[..................... 158
*\rofor*<t\pHJ\ro.............................. 159
*oYHrQor....................................................... 16
ƔTLmHr.............................................................. 165
Ɣ6wLtch6HttLQJ................................................ 167
ƔUpGatLQJ........................................................ 170
ƔIQVtaOOLQJ6p
HHchData.................................. 17
4
<Introduction>
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba
®
FASSTest-2.4GHz
*
FX-22 series digital proportional R/C system.
This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make
WKHEHVWXVHRI\RXUV\VWHPDQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\,I\RXKDYHDQ\GLI¿FXOWLHV
ZKLOHXVLQJ\RXUV\VWHPSOHDVHFRQVXOWWKHPDQXDORXURQOLQH)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQVRQWKHZHE
SDJHVUHIHUHQFHGEHORZ\RXUKREE\GHDOHURUWKH)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHU
*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry
'XHWRXQIRUHVHHQFKDQJHVLQSURGXFWLRQSURFHGXUHVWKHLQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDLQHGLQWKLVPDQXDOLVVXEMHFWWR
change without notice.
6XSSRUW DQG 6HUYLFH ,WLV UHFRPPHQGHGWR KDYH\RXU )XWDEDHTXLSPHQW VHUYLFHGDQQXDOO\ GXULQJ\RXU
hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.
INNORT+$0(RIC$
3OHDVH IHHOIUHH WRFRQWDFW WKH )XWDED 6HUYLFH &HQWHU IRU DVVLVWDQFHLQ RSHUDWLRQXVH DQGSURJUDPPLQJ
3OHDVH EH VXUHWR UHJXODUO\ YLVLWWKH ); )UHTXHQWO\$VNHG 4XHVWLRQVZHEVLWH DWZZZIXWDEDUFFRP
IDT7KLV SDJHLQFOXGHV H[WHQVLYH SURJUDPPLQJ XVH VHWXS DQGVDIHW\ LQIRUPDWLRQRQ WKH ); UDGLR
system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this
ZHESDJH,I\RXGRQRW¿QGWKHDQVZHUVWR\RXUTXHVWLRQVWKHUHSOHDVHVHHWKHHQGRIRXU)$4DUHDIRU
information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response.
'RQ¶WKDYH,QWHUQHWDFFHVV",QWHUQHWDFFHVVLVDYDLODEOHDWQRFKDUJHDWPRVWSXEOLFOLEUDULHVVFKRROVDQG
RWKHUSXEOLFUHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHDIDEXORXVUHIHUHQFHIRUPDQ\PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQ
EHSULQWHGDQGVDYHGIRUIXWXUHUHIHUHQFHDQGFDQEHDFFHVVHGDWDQ\KRXURIWKHGD\QLJKWZHHNHQGRU
KROLGD\,I\RXGRQRWZLVKWRDFFHVVWKHLQWHUQHWIRULQIRUPDWLRQKRZHYHUGRQ¶WZRUU\2XUVXSSRUWWHDPV
are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.
)OR6(R9IC(ON/<:
Futaba Service Center
1$SROOR'ULYH6XLWH
&KDPSDLJQ,/
3KRQH
www.futaba-rc.com/service.html
Email: service@futaba-rc.com
)OR6U33ORT:
3RO*R$00IN*$NDU6(R4U(6TION6
3OHDVHVWDUWKHUHIRUDQVZHUVWRPRVWTXHVWLRQV
ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT
)D[
3KRQHRSWLRQ
OUT6ID(NORT+$0(RIC$
3OHDVHFRQWDFW\RXU)XWDEDLPSRUWHULQ\RXUUHJLRQRIWKHZRUOGWRDVVLVW\RXZLWKDQ\TXHVWLRQVSUREOHPV
or service needs.
3OHDVHUHFRJQL]HWKDWDOOLQIRUPDWLRQLQWKLVPDQXDODQGDOOVXSSRUWDYDLODELOLW\LVEDVHGXSRQWKHV\VWHPV
sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support
center for assistance.
5
<Introduction>
$ppOication([portand0odi¿cation
7KLVSURGXFWPD\EHXVHGIRUPRGHODLUSODQHRUVXUIDFHERDWFDUURERWXVH,WLVQRWLQWHQGHGIRUXVH
in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is
VXEMHFWWRUHJXODWLRQVRIWKH0LQLVWU\RI5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVDQGLVUHVWULFWHGXQGHU-DSDQHVHODZWR
such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:
D:KHQWKLVSURGXFWLVH[SRUWHGIURPWKHFRXQWU\RIPDQXIDFWXUHLWVXVHLVWREHDSSURYHGE\WKHODZV
JRYHUQLQJWKHFRXQWU\RIGHVWLQDWLRQZKLFKJRYHUQGHYLFHVWKDWHPLWUDGLRIUHTXHQFLHV,I WKLVSURGXFWLV
WKHQUHH[SRUWHGWRRWKHUFRXQWULHVLWPD\EHVXEMHFWWRUHVWULFWLRQVRQVXFKH[SRUW3ULRUDSSURYDORIWKH
DSSURSULDWHJRYHUQPHQWDXWKRULWLHVPD\EHUHTXLUHG,I\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGWKLVSURGXFWIURPDQH[SRUWHU
RXWVLGH\RXU FRXQWU\DQG QRW WKHDXWKRUL]HG)XWDED GLVWULEXWRU LQ \RXUFRXQWU\SOHDVH FRQWDFW WKHVHOOHU
immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
E8VHRIWKLVSURGXFWZLWKRWKHUWKDQPRGHOVPD\EHUHVWULFWHGE\([SRUWDQG7UDGH&RQWURO5HJXODWLRQV
DQGDQDSSOLFDWLRQIRUH[SRUWDSSURYDOPXVWEHVXEPLWWHG7KLVHTXLSPHQWPXVWQRWEHXWLOL]HGWRRSHUDWH
HTXLSPHQWRWKHUWKDQUDGLRFRQWUROOHGPRGHOV
0RGLILFDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWV)XWDEDLVQRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUXQDXWKRUL]HG
PRGLILFDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQG UHSODFHPHQWRISDUWVRQ WKLVSURGXFW$Q\ VXFKFKDQJHVPD\YRLG WKH
warranty.
CompOiancHInformation6tatHmHntforU.6.$.
7KLVGHYLFHWUDGHQDPH)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQPRGHOQXPEHU56%FRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH)&&
5XOHV2SHUDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRWKHIROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQV
7KLVGHYLFHPD\QRWFDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHDQG
7KLVGHYLFH PXVWDFFHSW DQ\ LQWHUIHUHQFHUHFHLYHG LQFOXGLQJ LQWHUIHUHQFHWKDW PD\FDXVH XQGHVLUHG
operation.
7KLV PRGXOH PHHWVWKH UHTXLUHPHQWV IRU DPRELOH GHYLFH WKDWPD\ EH XVHG DW VHSDUDWLRQGLVWDQFHV RI
more than 20cm from human body.
7R PHHWWKH5)H[SRVXUHUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKH)&&WKLVGHYLFHVKDOOQRWEHFRORFDWHGZLWKDQRWKHU
transmitting device.
The responsible party of this device compliance is:
Futaba Service Center
1$SROOR'ULYH6XLWH&KDPSDLJQ,/86$
7(/RU(PDLOVXSSRUW#IXWDEDUFFRP6XSSRUW
7(/RU(PDLOVHUYLFH#IXWDEDUFFRP6HUYLFH
7KH 5%5& 6($/ RQWKH QLFNHOFDGPLXPEDWWHU\ FRQWDLQHG LQ )XWDED SURGXFWV LQGLFDWHV WKDW
Futaba Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect
DQGUHF\FOHWKHVHEDWWHULHVDWWKHHQGRIWKHLUXVHIXOOLYHVZKHQWDNHQRXWRIVHUYLFHZLWKLQWKH
8QLWHG 6WDWHV 7KH5%5& SURJUDPSURYLGHV DFRQYHQLHQW DOWHUQDWLYH WR SODFLQJ XVHG QLFNHO
FDGPLXPEDWWHULHVLQWRWKHWUDVKRUPXQLFLSDOZDVWHV\VWHPZKLFKLVLOOHJDOLQVRPHDUHDV.
IRU86$
You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please
FDOO%$77(5< IRU LQIRUPDWLRQ RQ 1L&GEDWWHU\UHF\FOLQJLQ\RXUDUHD )XWDED &RUSRUDWLRQ RI
America's involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and
conserving natural resources.
5%5&LVDWUDGHPDUNRIWKH5HFKDUJHDEOH%DWWHU\5HF\FOLQJ&RUSRUDWLRQ
6
<Introduction>
)HdHraOCommunicationVCommiVVionIntHrfHrHncH6tatHmHntforU.6.$.
7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV%GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQW
WR3DUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV7KHVHOLPLWVDUHGHVLJQHGWRSURYLGHUHDVRQDEOHSURWHFWLRQDJDLQVWKDUPIXO
interference in a residential installation.
7KLV HTXLSPHQW JHQHUDWHV XVHV DQG FDQ UDGLDWH UDGLR IUHTXHQF\ HQHUJ\ DQG LI QRW LQVWDOOHG DQG XVHG LQ
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVPD\FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV+RZHYHUWKHUH
LV QRJXDUDQWHH WKDWLQWHUIHUHQFH ZLOO QRW RFFXU LQ D SDUWLFXODULQVWDOODWLRQ ,IWKLV HTXLSPHQW GRHV FDXVH
KDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRRUWHOHYLVLRQUHFHSWLRQZKLFKFDQEHGHWHUPLQHGE\WXUQLQJWKHHTXLSPHQWRII
DQGRQWKHXVHULVHQFRXUDJHGWRWU\WRFRUUHFWWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHE\RQHRUPRUHRIWKHIROORZLQJPHDVXUHV
--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
,QFUHDVHWKHVHSDUDWLRQEHWZHHQWKHHTXLSPHQWDQGUHFHLYHU
--Consult the dealer or your Futaba Serivce center for help.
C$UTION:
To assure continued FCC compliance:
$Q\FKDQJHVRUPRGL¿FDWLRQV QRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHJUDQWHHRIWKLV GHYLFH FRXOGYRLGWKHXVHUV
DXWKRULW\WRRSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW
([poVurHtoRadio)rHquHnc\Radiation
7RFRPSO\ZLWK)&&5)H[SRVXUHFRPSOLDQFHUHTXLUHPHQWVDVHSDUDWLRQGLVWDQFHRIDWOHDVWFPPXVWEH
maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
7KLVGHYLFHPXVWQRWEHFRORFDWHGRURSHUDWLQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUDQWHQQDRUWUDQVPLWWHU
0HaninJof6pHciaO0arNinJV
Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks:
D$N*(R3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQVDQGFDXVHGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\LIQRW
carried out properly.
:$RNIN*3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRDGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQRUFDXVHGHDWKRUVHULRXVLQMXU\
WR WKHXVHU LIQRW FDUULHG RXW SURSHUO\ RUSURFHGXUHV ZKHUHWKH SUREDELOLW\ RI VXSHU¿FLDO LQMXU\ RU
physical damage is high.
C$UTION  3URFHGXUHVZKHUH WKH SRVVLELOLW\RI VHULRXV LQMXU\WR WKH XVHULV VPDOO EXWWKHUH LV D
GDQJHURILQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLIQRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\
= Prohibited = Mandatory
:arninJ: Always keep electrical components away from small children.
)/<IN*6$)(T<
:$RNIN*
7RHQVXUHWKHVDIHW\RI\RXUVHOIDQGRWKHUVSOHDVHREVHUYHWKHIROORZLQJSUHFDXWLRQV
+aYH rHJuOar maintHnancHpHrformHd. Although your FX-22 protects the model memories with
QRQYRODWLOH((3520PHPRU\ZKLFKGRHVQRWUHTXLUHSHULRGLFUHSODFHPHQWDQGQRWDEDWWHU\WKH
transmitter still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system
WR WKH )XWDED6HUYLFH &HQWHU DQQXDOO\GXULQJ \RXU QRQÀ\LQJVHDVRQIRU D FRPSOHWHFKHFNXS DQG
service.
7
<Introduction>
Ni0+/NiCd%attHr\
CharJHthHbattHriHV6HH&KDUJLQJWKH1L&GEDWWHULHVIRUGHWDLOV$OZD\VUHFKDUJHWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
DQGUHFHLYHUEDWWHULHVEHIRUHHDFKÀ\LQJVHVVLRQ$ORZEDWWHU\ZLOOVRRQGLHSRWHQWLDOO\FDXVLQJORVV
RIFRQWURODQG D FUDVK:KHQ\RX EHJLQ \RXU À\LQJVHVVLRQ UHVHW\RXU );¶V EXLOWLQWLPHUDQG
during the session pay attention to the duration of usage.
6topÀ\inJOonJbHforH\ourbattHriHVbHcomHOowoncharJH.Donot rHO\on\ourradio¶V Oow
battHr\warninJV\VtHmVintHndHd onO\ aVaprHcautionto tHOO\ouwhHn
torHcharJH.$Owa\V
chHcN\ourtranVmittHrandrHcHiYHrbattHriHVpriortoHachÀiJht.
:hHrHto)O\
We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs
DQGILHOGVE\DVNLQJ\RXU QHDUHVW KREE\ GHDOHU RU LQ WKH 86E\FRQWDFWLQJWKH$FDGHP\RI0RGHO
Aeronautics.
<RXFDQDOVRFRQWDFWWKHQDWLRQDO$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV$0$ZKLFKKDVPRUHWKDQ
FKDUWHUHGFOXEVDFURVVWKHFRXQWU\7KURXJKDQ\RQHRIWKHPLQVWUXFWRUWUDLQLQJSURJUDPVDQGLQVXUHG
newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
$cadHm\of0odHO$HronauticV
(DVW0HPRULDO'ULYH
0XQFLH,1
7HOH
)D[
or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org
$Owa\V pa\particuOar attHntion to thH À\inJ ¿HOd¶V ruOHV as well as the presence and location
RIVSHFWDWRUVWKHZLQGGLUHFWLRQDQGDQ\REVWDFOHVRQWKH¿HOG%HYHU\FDUHIXOÀ\LQJLQDUHDVQHDU
SRZHU OLQHV WDOO EXLOGLQJVRU FRPPXQLFDWLRQIDFLOLWLHV DVWKHUH PD\ EH UDGLR LQWHUIHUHQFH LQ WKHLU
vicinity.
8
<Introduction>
Ni0+/NiCd%attHr\6afHt\and+andOinJinVtructionV
I03ORT$NT
Use only the )utabaVpHciaO charJHr included with this set or other chargers approved by Futaba to
charge the NiMH batteries in the FX-22 transmitter included with this set.
It is important to understand the operating characteristics of NiMH/NiCd batteries.Always read the
VSHFL¿FDWLRQVSULQWHGRQWKHODEHORI\RXU1L0+1L&GEDWWHU\DQGFKDUJHUSULRUWRXVH)DLOXUHWRIROORZ
WKHSURFHHGLQJSUHFDXWLRQVFDQTXLFNO\UHVXOWLQVHYHUHSHUPDQHQWGDPDJHWRWKHEDWWHULHVDQGLWV
surroundings and possibly result in a )IR(
I03ORT$NT3R(C$UTION6
Do not attempt to disassemble NiMH/NiCd packs or cells.
Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to come in contact with moisture or water at any time.
$OZD\VSURYLGHDGHTXDWHYHQWLODWLRQDURXQG1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHVGXULQJFKDUJHGLVFKDUJHZKLOHLQ
XVHDQGGXULQJVWRUDJH
Do not leave a NiMH/NiCd battery unattended at any time while being charged or discharged.
'RQRWDWWHPSWWRFKDUJH1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHVZLWKDFKDUJHUWKDWLV127GHVLJQHGIRU1L0+1L&G
EDWWHULHVDVSHUPDQHQWGDPDJHWRWKHEDWWHU\DQGFKDUJHUFRXOGUHVXOW
$OZD\VFKDUJH1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHVLQD¿UHSURRIORFDWLRQ'RQRWFKDUJHRUGLVFKDUJH1L0+1L&G
EDWWHULHVRQFDUSHWDFOXWWHUHGZRUNEHQFKQHDUSDSHUSODVWLFYLQ\OOHDWKHURUZRRGRULQVLGHDQ5
&PRGHORUIXOOVL]HGDXWRPRELOH0RQLWRUWKHFKDUJHDUHDZLWKDVPRNHRU¿UHDODUP
'RQRWFKDUJH 1L0+1L&GEDWWHULHV DW FXUUHQWV JUHDWHU WKDQ WKH ³&´ UDWLQJ RI WKHEDWWHU\ ³&´
HTXDOVWKHUDWHGFDSDFLW\RIWKHEDWWHU\
'RQRWDOORZ1L0+1L&GFHOOVWRRYHUKHDWDWDQ\WLPH&HOOVZKLFKUHDFKJUHDWHUWKDQGHJUHHV
)DKUHQKHLW&VKRXOGEHSODFHGLQD¿UHSURRIORFDWLRQ
NiMH/NiCd cells will not charge fully when too cold or show full charge.
,WLVQRUPDOIRUWKHEDWWHULHVWREHFRPHZDUPGXULQJFKDUJLQJEXWLIWKHFKDUJHURUEDWWHU\EHFRPHV
excessively hot disconnect the battery from the charger immediately!! Always inspect a battery which
KDVSUHYLRXVO\RYHUKHDWHGIRUSRWHQWLDOGDPDJHDQGGRQRWUHXVHLI\RXVXVSHFWLWKDVEHHQGDPDJHG
in any way.
Do not use a NiMH/NiCd battery if you suspect physical damage has occurred to the pack. Carefully
LQVSHFWWKHEDWWHU\ IRU HYHQWKHVPDOOHVWRIGHQWVFUDFNVVSOLWVSXQFWXUHVRUGDPDJHWRWKHZLULQJ
DQGFRQQHFWRUV'2 127DOORZWKH EDWWHU\¶VLQWHUQDOHOHFWURO\WHWRJHWLQWRH\HVRURQ VNLQ²ZDVK
DIIHFWHGDUHDVLPPHGLDWHO\LIWKH\FRPHLQFRQWDFWZLWKWKHHOHFWURO\WH,ILQGRXEWSODFHWKHEDWWHU\
LQD¿UHSURRIORFDWLRQIRUDWOHDVWPLQXWHV
'RQRWVWRUHEDWWHULHVQHDUDQRSHQÀDPHRUKHDWHU
Do not discharge NiMH/NiCd batteries at currents which exceed the discharge current rating of the
battery.
Always store NiMH/NiCd cells/packs in a secure location away from children.
Never remove the SD card or turn off power
while entering data.
Never store the SD card where it may be
VXEMHFW WR VWURQJ VWDWLFHOHFWULFLW\ RUPDJQHWLF
¿HOGV
'R QRWH[SRVH WKH6' FDUGWR GLUHFW VXQOLJKW
excessive humidity or corrosive environments.
'RQRWH[SRVH WKH 6'FDUGWRGLUWPRLVWXUH
ZDWHURUÀXLGVRIDQ\NLQG
Always hold the SD card by the edges during
installation and removal.
%HFHUWDLQ WR LQVHUWWKH6' FDUG LQWKHFRUUHFW
direction.
6HcurHDiJitaO6D0Hmor\Card+andOinJInVtructionV
6DcardiVnotincOudHdwiththiVVHt
9
<Introduction>
$tthHÀ\inJ¿HOd
7RSUHYHQW SRVVLEOHGDPDJHWR \RXU UDGLRJHDU WXUQ WKHSRZHU VZLWFKHV RQDQG RIILQ WKH SURSHU
VHTXHQFH
3XOOWKURWWOHVWLFNWRLGOHSRVLWLRQRURWKHUZLVHGLVDUP\RXUPRWRUHQJLQH
2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen.
&RQ¿UPWKHSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG
4. Turn on your receiver power.
7HVWDOOFRQWUROV,IDVHUYRRSHUDWHVDEQRUPDOO\GRQ¶WDWWHPSWWRÀ\XQWLO\RXGHWHUPLQHWKHFDXVHRI
the problem.
7HVWWRHQVXUHWKDWWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJVDUHFRUUHFWDIWHUDGMXVWLQJWKHP7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURIIDQG
FRQ¿UPWKHSURSHUVXUIDFHWKURWWOHPRYHPHQWV7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUEDFNRQ
6WDUW\RXUHQJLQH
&RPSOHWHDIXOOUDQJHFKHFN
$IWHU À\LQJ EULQJ \RXUWKURWWOH VWLFN WR LGOHSRVLWLRQ HQJDJH DQ\ NLOO VZLWFKHVRU RWKHUZLVH GLVDUP
your motor/engine.
7XUQRIIUHFHLYHUSRZHU
7XUQRIIWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHU
,I\RXGRQRW WXUQRQ\RXUV\VWHPLQWKLVRUGHU\RXPD\GDPDJH\RXUVHUYRVRUFRQWURO VXUIDFHV
IORRG\RXUHQJLQHRULQWKHFDVHRIHOHFWULFSRZHUHGRUJDVROLQHSRZHUHGPRGHOV WKHHQJLQHPD\
XQH[SHFWHGO\WXUQRQDQGFDXVHDVHYHUHLQMXU\
:hiOH\ouarHJHttinJrHad\toÀ\if\oupOacH\ourtranVmittHronthHJroundbHVurHthatthH
windwonttipitoYHr.IfitiVNnocNHdo
YHrWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNPD\EHDFFLGHQWDOO\PRYHGFDXVLQJ
WKHHQJLQHWRVSHHGXS$OVRGDPDJHWR\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\RFFXU
In order to maintain complete control of your aircraft it is important that itrHmainVYiVibOH at aOO
timHV)O\LQJEHKLQGODUJHREMHFWVVXFKDVEXLOGLQJVJUDLQELQVHWFLVQRWVXJJHVWHG'RLQJVRPD\
UHVXOWLQWKHUHGXFWLRQRIWKHTXDOLW\RIWKHUDGLRIUHTXHQF\OLQNWRWKHPRGHO
Do notJraVp thHtranVmittHrV antHnna durinJ ÀiJht. 'RLQJVR PD\GHJUDGH WKH TXDOLW\ RI WKH
UDGLRIUHTXHQF\WUDQVPLVVLRQ
$VZLWKDOOUDGLRIUHTXHQF\WUDQVPLVVLRQVWKHVWURQJHVWDUHDRIVLJQDOWUDQVPLVVLRQLVIURPWKHVLGHV
RIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVDQWHQQD$VVXFKWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGQRWEHSRLQWHGGLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXU
À\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHVWKLVVLWXDWLRQHDVLO\PRYHWKHDQWHQQDWRFRUUHFWWKLVVLWXDWLRQ
Dont fO\in thH rain Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick
openings and cause erratic operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a
FRQWHVWEHVXUHWRFRYHU\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUZLWKD SODVWLFEDJRUZDWHUSURRIEDUULHU1HYHUIO\LI
lightning is expected.
10
<Before Use>
BEFORE USE
Features
FASSTest system
The FX-22 transmitter has adopted the newly developed bidirectional communication system "FASSTest"
.
Data from the receiver can be checked in your transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 14channels (linear 12
channels + switch 2 channels) 2.4GHz dedicated system.
S.BUS2 system
By using the S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a
minimum amount of cables.
Model types
6 swash types are available for helicopters. 6 types of main wings and 3 types of tail wings are available
for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at
the factory.
NiMH battery
FX-22 is operated by a 7.2V/1800 mAh battery.
SD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
Model data can be saved to an SD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When FX-22 transmitter
VRIWZDUH¿OHVDUHUHOHDVHGWKHVRIWZDUHFDQEHXSGDWHGE\XVLQJDQ6'FDUGXSGDWH
Data input
Large graphic LCD and Touch Sensor substantially improve ease of setup.
Edit button
Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME
screen during operation. Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch
sensor.
Vibration function
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms by vibrating the transmitter in addition to
sounding a buzzer.
11
<Before Use>
Contents and Technical Speci¿cations
6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH
Your FX-22 includes the following components:
Note: The battery in the FX-22 transmitter is not connected to the battery
connector at initial. Please connect the battery connector before use.
FX-22 2.4 GHz FASSTest® transmitter
NiMH transmitter battery, 7.2 V / 1800 mAh
FASSTest®-R7008SB 2.4 GHz receiver
Switch harness with charge socket
HBC-2C(4) battery charger
Transmitter FX-22
(2-stick, 14-channel, FASSTest-2.4G system)
Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band
System: FASSTest14CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULT, FASST 7CH, S-FHSS, switchable
Power supply: 7.2V / 1800mAh NiMH battery
Receiver R7008SB
(FASSTest-2.4G system, dual antenna diversity, S.BUS/S.BUS2 system)
Power requirement: 3.7V~7.2V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Size: 0.98 x 1.86 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 47.3 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: 0.38 oz. (10.9g)
(*1) When using ESC's make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.
12
<Before Use>
The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more
information:
• HT6F1800B Transmitter battery pack - the (1800mAh) transmitter NiMH battery pack may be easily
H[FKDQJHGZLWKDIUHVKRQHWRSURYLGHHQRXJKFDSDFLW\IRUH[WHQGHGÀ\LQJVHVVLRQV
7UDLQHUFRUGWKHRSWLRQDOWUDLQLQJFRUGPD\EHXVHGWRKHOSDEHJLQQLQJSLORWOHDUQWRÀ\HDVLO\E\SODFLQJ
the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the FX-22 transmitter may be connected to another FX-22
system, as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The FX-22 transmitter uses one of the three
cord plug types according to the transmitter connected. (Refer to the description at the TRAINER function
instructions).
• Servos - there are various kinds of servos. Please choose from the servos of Futaba what suited the model
and the purpose of using you. If you utilize a S.BUS system, you should choose a S.BUS servo. An analog
servo cannot be used if "FASSTest12CH mode" is used.
• Telemetry sensor - please purchase an optional sensor, in order to utilize bidirectional communication
system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky.
[
Temperature sensor : SBS-01T] [Altitude sensor : SBS-01A] [RPM sensor
magnet type : SBS-01RM]
[RPM sensor
optical type : SBS-01RO] [GPS sensor : SBS-01G] [Voltage sensor : SBS-01V]
• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, hub,etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavy-
duty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.
• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros is available for your aircraft or helicopter needs.
*RYHUQRUIRUKHOLFRSWHUXVH$XWRPDWLFDOO\DGMXVWVWKURWWOHVHUYRSRVLWLRQWRPDLQWDLQDFRQVWDQWKHDG
speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc.
• Receivers - various models of Futaba receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (Receivers for
FASSTest and FASST,S-FHSS types are available.)
• Optional Charger - Futaba CR-2000 NiMH/NiCd Transmitter/Receiver Battery Charger.
13
<Before Use>
●Antenna
●Monitor LED
●Switch(SD,SG,SH)
●Switch(SA,SB,SE)
●RotaryTrim
(T3,T4)
●Volume(LD,RD)
●Stick
●LinearSlider(LS)
●LinearSlider(RS)
●Stick
●RotaryTrim
 (T1,T2)
●U.menu/Mon
ࠉButton
●Home/Exit
Button
●SensorTouch
TM
(SYS,LINK,
MDL,RTN,S1)
(J1)
(J2)
(J4)
(J3)
●LCD
●Power Switch
Transmitter controls
14
<Before Use>
Transmitter's Antenna:
As with all radio frequency transmissions, the
strongest area of signal transmission is from the
sides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, the
antenna should not be pointed directly at the model.
If your flying style creates this situation, easily
move the antenna to correct this situation.
LED (Left)
Displays the "non-default condition" warning.
• Blinking
Power switch is turned on when any condition
switch is activated (in the ON state).
LED (Right)
Displays the state of radio frequency
transmission.
• Off
Radio waves are in the OFF state.
• On
Radio waves are being transmitted.
• Blinking
Range check mode.
Monitor LED display
The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED
at the upper part of the front of a FX-22.
•
Rotating antenna
The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angled
90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than this
can damage it. The antenna is not removable.
90°
90°
CAUTION
Please do not grasp the transmitter's
antenna during Àight.
Doing so may degrade the quality of the RF
transmission to the model
Do not carry the transmitter by the
antenna.
There is the danger that the antenna wire will break
and operation will become impossible.
Do not pull the antenna forcefully.
There is the danger that the antenna wire will break
and operation will become impossible.
Low power
High power High power
If you have a transmitter
at an angle of a figure, an
antenna will be good to use
it, bending 90 degrees.
It is
not good
for
there to be a model
on flight in the
direction tip of an
antenna.
15
<Before Use>
Switch (SA-SH)
(Switch Type)
• SA : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SB : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SD : 3 positions; Alternate; Long lever
• SE : 2 positions; Alternate; Long lever
• SG : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SH : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
*You can choose switch and set the ON/OFF-direction in the
setting screen of the mixing functions.
Linear Slider LS,RS
The linear slider LS and RS offer analog input.
*The FX-32 transmitter beeps when the lever comes to the
center.
*You can select a linear slider and set the movement direction
on the setting screen of mixing functions.
Home/Exit and U.menu/Mon. Button
Volume
LD RD
Volume LD and RD:
The volume LD and RD knobs allow analog
input.
*The FX-22 transmitter beeps when the volume knob reaches
the center position.
*You can use each setting screen of the mixing functions to
VHOHFWYROXPHVDQGGH¿QHWKHGLUHFWLRQRIDPRYHPHQW
Rotary Trims
T1
T2
T3
T4
Rotary Trims T1, T2, T3 and T4:
This transmitter is equipped with four (4) rotary
trims. Each time you press a trim button, the trim
position moves one step. If you continue pressing it,
the trim position starts to move faster. In addition,
when the trim position returns to the center, the
tone will change. You can always monitor trim
positions by referencing the LCD screen.
*You can select the trim step amount and the display unit
on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within the
linkage menu.
Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the
non-volatile memory and will remain there.
Home/Exit
Button
U.menu/Mon
Button
Press To Servo Monitor display
Press and hold To User Menu display
Home/Exit:
U.menu/Mon:
Press
Return to the previous
screen
Press and hold
(Except HOME)
Return to the Home
screen
It pushes from HOME
screen.
To TELEMETRY display
Press and hold from
HOME screen.
Key lock/Lock release
LS RS
16
<Before Use>
SensorTouch™ operation Condition Working
• Short 'tap'
S1
If the screen has more than one page.
The cursor moves to the top of next page.
If the screen have only one (1) page. The cursor moves to the top of page.
If the input data mode with blinking the setting data. The input data is canceled.
RTN
At the moving cursor mode. Change to the input data mode.
At the input data mode. Change to the moving cursor mode.
At the input data mode with blinking the setting data. The data is entered.
• Two short 'taps'
SYS
At all screens Jump to System Menu screen directly.
LNK
At all screens Jump to Linkage Menu screen directly.
MDL
At all screens Jump to Model Menu screen directly.
• Touch and hold for
one (1) second.
S1
At the HOME screen Key lock On or Off
RTN
At the input data mode without blinking the setting
data.
Reset to the initialized value.
• Scrolling
Outline
of
“RTN”
Lightly circling the outside edge of the RTN button. The cursor moves accordingly.
During the data input mode. Increases or decreases values accordingly.
Touch sensor operation
Data input operation is performed using the touch sensor.
Movement of cursor, value input or mode selection
:
Movement of the cursor on the menu screen and
movement of the cursor among items on a setup
screen can be controlled by scrolling your finger
to the left and right in the direction of the arrow in
the scrolling diagram above. You can also go to the
next page, if there is a next page.
This scrolling technique is also used for data
input, value input, mode selection, and similar
operations. Examples include: Value, ON, OFF,
INH, ACT, etc.
RTN button:
Touch the RTN button when you want to open
a setup screen or to switch between cursor move
mode (reverse display) and data input mode (box
display).
This button can also be used as the enter button
when a confirmation message is displayed on the
screen, etc.
S1 button:
When there is a next page on a menu screen or
setup screen, you can go to that page by touching
the S1 button. In this case, the cursor moves to the
screen title item of the page.
Exiting setup screen:
To end the operation on a setup screen and return
to the menu screen, move the cursor to the screen
title item and touch the RTN button.
To return to home screen directly, touch the
Home/Exit button for 1 second.
Alternatively, move the cursor to the screen title
item and touch the RTN button to return to the
home screen from a menu screen.
17
<Before Use>
Note:
6FUROORSHUDWLRQ&LUFOH\RXU¿QJHURQWKH RXWVLGHHGJHRI
the RTN button. The sensors may mis-read your touch as a
reverse rotation if the circle is smaller, or performed on the
inside edge of the RTN button.
* The SensorTouch™ may not operate smoothly if your hand
is touching the surrounding case parts. As such, please
PDNHVXUHWKDWWKHWLSRI\RXU¿QJHULVDFWXDOO\RSHUDWLQJWKH
SensorTouch™.
*If the SensorTouch™ does not register your input, please
WU\DJDLQDIWHUOLJKWO\WDSSLQJ\RXU¿QJHURQWKHVHQVRURQFH
again.
* Do not operate the SensorTouch™ with gloves worn. The
SensorTouch™ might not react.
CAUTION
The touch sensor might not operate by
receiving the spark noise generated from
the gasoline engine etc. In this case, please
operate your transmitter from the noise
source apart.
Stick Adjustment
Adjustment of the stick lever length
<RXFDQDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIVWLFNOHYHUVDV\RX
OLNH,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWRDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIWKH
sticks in line with your hand size.
1. Hold the lever head "B" and turn the lever
head "A" counter-clockwise. The lock will be
released.
2. Turn the lever-head "A" clockwise as you hold
the lever-head "B" after placing it as you like.
Adjustment of stick lever tension
The tension of the self-return type stick lever can
EHDGMXVWHG
1. Like next explanation, the rear case of a
transmitter is removed and battery connection
also removes it.
Now you'll see the view shown in the figure
below.
2. Use a cross slot screwdriver to adjust the spring
strength as you prefer by turning the adjusting
screw of the stick you want to adjust.
*Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension.
CAUTION: If you loosen the screw too much,
the stick may not operate because it is
caught internally.
3. At the end of adjustment, re-install the rear
case.
•Stick Tension (J2)
(Mode 2)
•Stick Tension (J1)
(Mode 1/2)
•Stick Tension (J4)
(Mode 1/2)
•Stick Tension (J3)
(Mode 1)
A
Lever Head
B
Lever Head
+ screw is clockwise.
Stick tension maximum Stick tension minimum
+ screw is counter-clockwise.
A screw is kept
from coming out
from a line.
A screw is kept
from coming out
from a line.
*The screw will touch the case.*The screw will touch the case.
18
<Before Use>
SD Card (secure digital memory card) (not
included)
The FX-22 transmitter model data can be stored
by using any commonly found SD card. When
FX-22 transmitter update software is released, the
software is updated using an SD card. The FX-22
is capable of using SD cards with a memory size
between 32MB and 2GB.
Inserting/removing the SD card
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power to the
transmitter before inserting or removing
the SD card.
As the SD card is a precision device, do not
use excessive force when inserting.
SD card reader/writer
Saving model data and update files (released
from Futaba) into the SD card, you can use those
files on your FX-22 transmitter. Equipment for
reading and writing SD cards is available at most
electronics stores.
Stored data
When you have a problem of saving or reading
data after a long period of use, please get a new SD
card.
*We do not have the responsibility of compensating any
failure or damage to the data stored in the memory card no
matter what the reason is. Be sure to keep a backup of your
important data in your SD card.
① A side cover is opened.
② It inserts until it locks SD card into SD card slot.
*It is releasable if a card is pushed once again.
*Don't mistake the
both sides/ the
direction of
SD card.
*Do
b
SD card slot
19
<Before Use>
How to remove a rear case:
$UHDUFDVHLVUHPRYHGZKHQSHUIRUPLQJEDWWHU\H[FKDQJHVWLFNWHQVLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGVZLWFKH[FKDQJH
Take care not to break an internal electronic board, wiring, and parts.
① "OPEN" of a slider is pushed. ② It slides in the direction
of an arrow.
*When a slider is raised, it is the structure which
an internal stopper releases
* When shutting a case, a slider is lowered
and a stopper is locked.
③ A rear case is removed in
the direction of an arrow.
m
oved in
a
n
ar
ro
w.
Lock
Release
Lock
Lock
Lock
Lock
Release ReleaseRelease Release
Slider
Stopper
Rear case
* When shutting a case, it
attaches from a lower pawl.
20
<Before Use>
Connector/Plug
Connector for trainer function
When you use the trainer function, connect the
optional trainer cable between the transmitters for
teacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen in the System menu.
S.BUS connector (S.I/F)
When setting an S.BUS servo and telemetry
sensor, connect them both here.
(Supply power by 3-way hub or 2-way cord.)
Earphone plug
Connecting a stereo headphone to this plug, the
speech information of telemetry can be heard.
Connector for battery charger
This is the connector for charging the NiMH
battery 7,2V/ 1,800mAH that is installed in the
transmitter. Do not use any other chargers except
the attached special charger.
① Side cover is opened.
② Side cover is stuffed
into inside.
② Side cover is stuffed
into inside.
Trainer
Connector
S.BUS (S.I/F)
Connector
Earphone
Plug
Charge
Plug
Installation and removal of the transmitter
battery
Attachment of the battery
1. Open the rear case.
2. A battery is Àxed using two bands.
3. Connect the battery connector.
4. Close the rear case completely.
Battery removal
Note: If you remove the battery while the
power is on, the data you have set will not
be saved.
1. Open the rear case.
2. Disconnect the battery connector.
3. Two bands are removed and the remove the
battery.
4. Close the rear case completely.
WARNING
Be careful not to drop the battery.
Never disconnect the battery connector from the
FX-22 transmitter after turning off the power
until the screen is completely blank and the
transmitter has shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error" will
be shown the next time when you turn on the power of the
transmitter. Do not use the transmitter as it is. Send it to the
Futaba service center.
HT6F1800B
Battery
Connector
Band
Connector
WARNING
Do not connect any other chargers except the
special charger to this charging connector.
21
<Before Use>
When a tray is attached
Transmitter tray
Washer
(Back Case)
2.5mm
(Fig.1)
2.5x10mm Screw
(Hex.)
3x10mm Screw
(Hex.)
2.5x8mm
Screw
Tray Base B
(x4)
Tray Base C
(x4)
Shaft A
Shaft B
Shaft C (Left)
Tray Board
(Left)
Tray Board
(Right)
Shaft C (Right)
Tray Base A
(x4)
1. Before assembly, take a back case off.
2. Make a hole in back case. (See FIG.1)
R!
L!
22
<Before Use>
Link/Mode Switch
Use the small plastic screw driver that was
included with your receiver.
The Link/Mode Switch is also used for the CH
mode selection.
Extra Voltage Connector
Use this connector when using a voltage
telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0
~ 70V) from the receiver to the transmitter.
You will need to purchase the optional
External Voltage input cable (CA-RVIN-700) .
You can then make a cable with an extra
connector to the External Voltage connector.
Receiver nomenclature
Before using the receiver, be sure to read the
precautions listed in the following pages.
Receiver R7008SB
Connector
"1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1
through 6
"7/B": outputs of 7 channels and power.
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
[S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ]
*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set
CH MODE of the following page to mode B or
mode D.
"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
[S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor ]
*When using 9 or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R7008SB and link both
to your transmitter.
Connector insertion
Firmly insert the connector in the direction
VKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH,QVHUWWKH6%86E\WXUQLQJ
it 90 degrees.
＋
−
Do not connect either a switch
or battery in this manner.
5HFHLYHU
Danger
DANGER
Don't connect a connector, as shown in a
before ¿gure.
*It will short-circuit, if it connected in this way. A short
circuit across the battery terminals may cause abnormal
KHDWLQJ¿UHDQGEXUQV
WARNING
S.BUS2 connectors
Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.
LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of
the receiver.
23
<Before Use>
R7008SB
CH Mode
The R7008SB receiver is a very versatile
unit. It has 8 PWM outputs, S.BUS and S.BUS2
outputs. Additionally the PWM outputs can be
changed from channels 1-8 to channels 9-12 If
you only desire to use it as an 8 channel receiver
(without S.BUS), it can be used without any
setting changes.
The FX-22 has the ability to link to two
R7008SB receivers. One of them outputting
channels 1-8 and the other outputting channels
9-12 giving you 12 PWM channels. Instructions
for this configuration and S.BUS operation
follow.
[How to change the R7008SB Channel mode.]
1. Press and hold down the Link/Mode button
on the R7008SB receiver.
2. Turn the receiver on while holding down
the Link/Mode button. when the LED
begins to blink green/red the button may
be released.
3. The LED should now be blinking red in one
of the patterns described by the chart
below.
4. Each press of the Mode/Link button
advances the receiver to the next mode.
5. When you reach the mode that you wish
to operate in, press and hold the Mode/
Link button for more than 2 seconds.
6. Once locked into the correct mode the
LED will change to a solid color.
7. Please cycle the receiver(s) power off and
back on again after changing the Channel
Mode.
Receiver connector
Setting channel
Mode A
1 ∼ 8CH
Mode B
1 ∼ 7CH
Mode C
9 ∼ 12CH
Mode D
9 ∼ 12CH
1 1199
2221010
3331111
4441212
555--
666--
7/B 7 7 - -
8/SB 8 S.BUS - S.BUS
Red LED blink 1time 2time 3time 4time
R7008SB CH MODE TABLE
DANGER
Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.
Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
DEQRUPDOKHDWLQJ¿UHDQGEXUQV
Please double check your polarity (
＋
and
−
) when hooking up your connectors.
* If
＋
and
−
of wiring are mistaken, it will damage,
ignite and explode.
Don’t connection to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.
24
<Before Use>
Receiver's Antenna Installation
The R7008SB has two antennas. In order to maximize signal reception and promote safe modeling Futaba
has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas and
À\SUREOHPIUHH
To obtain the best results of the diversity
function, please refer to the following
instructions:
1. The two antennas must be kept as straight
as possible. Otherwise it will reduce the
effective range.
2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.
This is not a critical figure, but the most
important thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal
objects that can attenuate the RF signal. In
this case the antennas should be placed
at both sides of the model. Then the best
RF signal condition is obtained at any Áying
attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away from
conductive materials, such as metal,
carbon and fuel tank by at least a half
inch. The coaxial part of the antennas does
not need to follow these guidelines, but do
not bend it in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.
*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other.
*The illustration demonstrates how the antenna should be placed.
*Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing: The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration,
shock, and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing
materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the
bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver,
you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, return the receiver to our service center for service.
Antenna
Antenna
Antenna
*Must be kept as straight as possible.
Coaxial cable
R7008SB Receiver
25
<Before Use>
Rubber
grommet
Brass eyelet
Wood screw
Servo mount
2.3-2.6mm nut
washer
Rubber
grommet
Brass eyelet
Servo mount
2.3-2.6mm screw
(Helicopter) (Airplane/Glider)
Servo lead wires
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight, provide a
little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.
Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet so
that the lead wire is neat.
Margin in the lead wire.
Mounting the power switch
When mounting a power switch to an airframe,
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn
the switch ON/OFF without binding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can be
covered by engine oil and dust. In general, it is
recommended to mount the power switch on the
VLGHRIWKHIXVHODJHWKDWLVRSSRVLWHWKHPXIÀHU
Safety precautions when you install
receiver and servos
WARNING
Connecting connectors
Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration
and water
Wrap the receiver with something soft
such as foam rubber to avoid vibration.
If there is a chance of getting wet, put the
receiver in a waterproof bag or balloon to
avoid water.
Receiver's antenna
Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do not
bind the receiver's antenna with the cables
for servos.
Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables, etc.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce the
radio reception sensitivity and range, and may cause a
crash.
Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods will
not bind or sag when operating the servos
to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the
servo could be damaged due to force on the gear train
and/or power consumption causing rapid battery drain.
Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount. And
be sure that the servo cases do not touch
directly to the metal parts such as servo
mount.
*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration
will travel to and possibly damage the servo.
Mounting the Servo
26
<Before Use>
S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation
7KLVVHWXVHVWKH6%866%86V\VWHP7KHZLULQJLVDVVLPSOL¿HGDQGFOHDQPRXQWLQJDVSRVVLEOHHYHQ
with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can be quickly installed to the fuselage
without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large number of
servos used.
Ɣ:KHQXVLQJ6%866%86VSHFLDOVHWWLQJVDQGPL[HVLQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\EHXQQHFHVVDU\
Ɣ7KH6%866%86VHUYRVPHPRUL]HWKHQXPEHURIFKDQQHOVWKHPVHOYHVVHWWDEOHZLWKWKH);
Ɣ7KH6%866%86V\VWHPDQGFRQYHQWLRQDOV\VWHPUHFHLYHUFRQYHQWLRQDO&+XVHGFDQEHPL[HG
Receiver: R7008SB
Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )
Switch: HSW-L
Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )
Elevator servo: BLS173SV(i)×2 ( Optional )
Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )
HUB×3 ( Optional )
Receiver: R7008SB
Servo: S3172SV×9 ( Optional )
HUB×4 ( Optional )
S.BUS Glider usage example
S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example
27
<Before Use>
S.BUS Wiring example
%DWWHU\
%DWWHU\
*<
([WHQVLRQ
FRUG
6ZLWFK
7HUPLQDOER[
+XE
+XE +XE
+XE
+XE
+XE
+XE
ق$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\ك
+XE
ق$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\ك
6%866HUYR
6%866HUYR
Receiver
●S.BUS Servo
Since the channel number is memorized by the
S.BUS itself, any connector can be used. When
the SBD-1 (sold separately) is used, ordinary
servos can be used with the S.BUS system.
*SBD-1 cannot be used by S.BUS2 port.
●When separate power supply used
When a large number of servos are used or
when high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven by a separate power supply by
using a separate Power Supply 3-way hub.
●
7HUPLQDOER[
Four connectors can be inserted
Three connectors can be
inserted.
Used when using a separate
power supply battery.
6ZLWFK
6%86
3RUW
6%
Orange
Green
*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set CH
Mode of the mode B or mode D.
WARNING
Power supply
Please make sure that you
use a battery that can deliver
enough capacity for the
number and kind of servos
used. Alkaline batteries
cannot be used.
28
<Before Use>
S.BUS2 System
Using the S.Bus2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.
Receiver port
S.BUS servo
S.BUS gyro
S.BUS2
servo
S.BUS2
gyro
Telemetry sensor
S.BUS ○ ○ ×
S.BUS2
× （※） ○ ○
S.BUS2 TABLE
（※）
Don't connect S.BUS servo,
S.BUS gyro to BUS2 connector.
6%86
SRUW
6%86
SRUW
6%
+XE
+XE +XE +XE
5XGGHUVHUYR
6%86VHUYR6%86VHUYR
6%86VHUYR
FRQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86J\UR
FRQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86VHUYR
FRQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU
FRQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH
6%86
*<52
&+PRGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@
ٔ
7HOHPHWU\
VHQVRU
S.BUS servo gyro has S.BUS correspondence and S.BUS2 correspondence.
Please con¿rm with a catalog or each operation manual.
29
<Before Use>
S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the FX-22. Channel setting and
other data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.
6%866%86VHUYR
6%866%86
GHYLFH
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU
);
1. Connect the S.BUS device you want to set
with as shown in the Àgure.
2. Turn on the transmitter power.
3. Call the setup screen.
 
Servo: System Menu
→
S.BUS servo
 
Sensor: Linkage Menu
→
Sensor
4. Perform setting in accordance with each
screen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.BUS servo, or telemetry device to be used
with the S.BUS device or receiver.
*It is not necessary to carry out multiple
connection of the battery like a T18MZ/
T14SG.
(It will damage, if it connects.)
*When you connect to a transmitter many servos
which consume many current, please use
"Another power supply HUB".
And electric power is supplied to a servo with
another power supply.
%DWWHU\
+XE +XE
+XE
ق$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\ك
+XE
ق$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\ك
6%866HUYR
●When separate power supply used
When a large number of servos are used or
when high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven by a separate power supply by
using a separate Power Supply 3-way hub.
Used when using a separate
power supply battery.
6ZLWFK
Green
30
<Before Use>
Telemetry System
The R7008SB receiver features bi-directional communication with a FASSTest Futaba transmitter using
the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized. It also
includes both standard PWM output ports and S.BUS output ports.
*Telemetry is available only in the FASSTest 14CH mode. (12CH mode displays only receiver battery
voltage and extra battery voltage.)
*The telemetry function requires the corresponding receiver (R7008SB).
* Telemetry display only FX-22 ID of R7008SB was remembered to be.
6%86
FRQQHFWRU
7HPSHUDWXUH
6HQVRU
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3 ∼ 5
Slot 6 ∼ 7
Slot 8 ∼ 15
Slot 16
Receiver
Battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
Power battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
6ZLWFK
);
7HUPLQDOER[
+XE
+XE
+XE
Info
Info
Info
Info
Info
Voltage
Signal
530
6HQVRU
$OWLWXGH
6HQVRU
*36
6HQVRU
9ROWDJH
6HQVRU
Slot 17
Slot 31
6HQVRU
6HQVRU
●Telemetry sensor (sold separately)
Your aircrafts data can be checked in the
transmitter by connecting various telemetry
sensors to the S.BUS2 connector of the
receiver.
●Slot No.
Servos are classified by channel, but sensors
are classified by “slot” . Since the initial slot
No. of the FX-22 is preset at each sensor, the
sensors can be used as is by connecting
them. There are 1
31 slots.
Info
Telemetry
Data
31
<Basic Operation>
BASIC OPERATION
How to charge the NiMH battery HT6F1800B
for the transmitter
Danger
The NiMH battery HT6F1800B is only for
your FX-22. Do not use this battery for other
equipment.
Be sure to use the attached special charger to
charge the battery.
*If you take the NiMH battery HT6F1800B out of the
transmitter, you can use the optional quick charger CR-2000
corresponding to NiMH battery.
[Method of charging battery]
*Connect to AC outlet
specified.
●Special charger
Receiver Batt.
Charging display
To FX-22 charge
connector
Transmitter Batt.
Charging display
1. Connect the special charger to the wall
socket (AC outlet).
2. Connect the connectors to the FX-22
charging jack.
&RQ¿UPWKDWWKHFKDUJLQJLQGLFDWRU/('ODPSLVRQ
*Turn off the transmitter while charging the battery.
3. Remove the battery after 15 hours.
*Battery charging will not automatically stop. Remove the
battery and transmitter from the charger and remove the
charger from the wall socket.
*It is recommended to reactivate the battery by cycling
several times if the battery has not been used for a long
period.
*In the case of NiMH/NiCd batteries, you may find poor
performance of the battery if you have used the battery
only for a short period or if you repeat charging while the
battery is not fully discharged. It is suggested to discharge
the battery to the recommended level after use. It is also
recommended to charge the battery just before use.
Battery Charging
Before charging batteries, read the "Cautions for handling battery and battery charger" in the section
"NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling Instructions".
32
<Basic Operation>
How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF
When turning on the power, the FX-22
transmitter will begin emmiting RF automatically
DIWHULWFRQ¿UPVWKHVXUURXQGLQJ5)FRQGLWLRQV
The FX-22 transmitter also offers the ability to
auto shut-down.
When turning on the power of the transmitter
1. Turn on the power switch of the transmitter.
7KHPHVVDJH&+(&.5)&21',7,21LVGLVSOD\HGIRUD
PRPHQW$WWKHVDPHWLPHWKHOHIW/('PRQLWRUEOLQNV
2. Then, you will see the home screen and the
transmitter begins to emit radio waves.
7KHOHIWDQGULJKW/('PRQLWRUVZLOOFKDQJHWRVROLGUHG
How to stop the transmitter
1. Turn off the power switch of the transmitter.
*The transmitter shuts down at once.
Low battery alarm
When the battery voltage reaches 7.2V, an
DXGLEOHDODUPZLOOVRXQG/DQG\RXUDLUFUDIW
immediately.
It can change from 6.0V to 7.6V by [WARNING]
RI>/,1.$*(0(18@
It recommends using it with an initial value.
*If you do not operate the transmitter (or move a stick,
knob, switch or digital trim) for 30 minutes, the message
3/($6(78512))32:(56:,7&+LVGLVSOD\HGDQG
an audible alarm will sound.
Warning display at power ON (Airplane/
Helicopter)
:KHQWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNGXULQJ3RZHU2QLVDW
the high side (or over 1/3 stick) a warning will be
displayed.
*below 1/3 stick, the warning display goes off.
Registration of the user's name
If so desired, the FX-22 transmitter can indicate
the owner's name.
User's name setup screen
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
*The home screen appears.
2. Lightly touch the SYS button twice rapidly
and the System menu appears.
3. Select [USER NAME] in the System menu and
touch the RTN button.
*The user name set up screen appears.
Input Box
*Current user name is displayed.
Changing the user name
1. Change the user name as described below:
[Moving cursor in input box]
Select [ł] or [ń], and touch the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button
is touched, the character immediately after
the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from the
character list and the RTN button is touched,
that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the
user name. (A space is also counted as one character.)
2. At the end of input, select [ENTER] and tuoch
the RTN button. (To terminate input and
return to the original state, select [CANCEL]
and touch the RTN button.)
THR Stick Slow
33
<Basic Operation>
Up/Down timer (ST1, ST2)
• Timer is displayed here.
Touch the RTN button at the [xx]:[xx.
xx] item to start/stop the timer.
• Use the cursor to highlight this, then
touch the RTN button at the ST1 or ST2
item to call the timer set-up screen.
*See the description at the back of this manual.
Home screen
Digital trim (T1 to T4)
• Trim position is displayed here.
• You can select the display unit
on the home screen on the
T1-T4 setting screen within the
linkage menu.
Model Name
• The model name that
is currently used is
displayed here.
• Use the cursor to
highlight this, then
touch the RTN button
to call the model
select set-up screen.
User's name
System timer
• This shows the accumulated time since
the latest reset. (Hour):(Minute)
• Use the cursor to highlight this, then
touch the RTN button for one second
to reset the system timer.
8VHWKHWRXFKVHQVRUWRVHOHFWWKHIROORZLQJGLVSOD\DUHDWRFDOOHDFKVHWWLQJVFUHHQDQGWRXFKWKH571
button. The setting screen appears.
RF indicator
Battery Indicator
• When the battery voltage
reaches 7.2V(Change in
Warning Menu), the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.
System mode
• System(FASSTest14CH etc.)
mode is displayed here.
• Use the cursor to highlight this,
then touch the RTN button
to call the frequency set-up
screen.
2
nd
Home screen
• Touch the RTN button at
the clock icon to call the
2
nd
home screen (large
size timer).
Model timer
• This shows the accumulated time
since the latest reset. (each model)
(Hour):(Minute)
• Use the cursor to highlight this,
then touch the RTN button for one
second to reset the model timer.
Key lock
• Touch the S1 button or push the
HOME/EXIT button for one second to
lock/unlock the key operation.
In the key lock mode the key icon is
displayed here.
Model type
SD card indicator
Condition name (Heli/Glider)
• In the normal condition, move the
cursor to the condition name and
touch the RTN button. The condition
name is changed and blinks.
It is possible to operate the digital
trim in all conditions.
VPP condition # (Air)
• When VPP function is assigned to a
channel, the current VPP condition
# is displayed here.
34
<Basic Operation>
Warning
%HVXUHWRFRQ¿UPWKHPRGHOQDPHEHIRUH
À\LQJ\RXUDLUFUDIW
Check the battery voltage as often as
possible and try to charge the battery
earlier. If the battery alarm makes a sound,
land your aircraft immediately.
User Menu
A user menu which allows the user to
customize and display frequently used functions
has been added.
1. When the "U.MENU" button is pushed for
two seconds, the user menu appears.
5HWXUQWRWKHKRPHVFUHHQE\WRXFKLQJWKH(;,7EXWWRQ
while the user menu is being displayed.
2. When the cursor highlights the dotted line,
"----------" and the RTN button is touched,
the menu selection screen appears.
3. When the cursor is moved to the setting
that you to set to the user menu and the
RTN button is touched, that setting screen
is added to the user menu.
4. The registered setting screen can be
called by moving the cursor to it and
touching the RTN button.
*When you want to delete an added screen from the user
menu, highlight item you wish to delete, press and hold
the RTN button for one second.
35
<Basic Operation>
Link procedure (FX-22/R7008SB)
(DFKWUDQVPLWWHUKDVDQLQGLYLGXDOO\DVVLJQHGXQLTXH,'FRGH,QRUGHUWRVWDUWRSHUDWLRQWKHUHFHLYHU
PXVWEHOLQNHGZLWKWKH,'FRGHRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUZLWKZKLFKLWLVEHLQJSDLUHG2QFHWKHOLQNLVPDGH
the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used
with another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary;
otherwise the receiver will not work.
Link procedure
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.
2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [SYSTEM] at the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [SINGLE] to [DUAL].
*Only two receivers can be used. In
"DUAL", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.
5. "F" will be chosen if it is used in France. others
"G" general.
6. When changing battery fail-safe voltage
from the initial value 3.8V, voltage is
changed here.
* Only in FASSTest Mode.
7.[LINK] is chosen by scrolling and the RTN
button is pushed. The transmitter will emit a
chime as it starts the linking process.
8. When the transmitter starts to chime, power
on the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.
9. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiver
and repeat the procedure above from Step 2.
10. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.
Less than 0.5 m
In "Link" Mode
Receiver ON
:You can do this through the LINKAGE Menu
and scroll to System and press RTN.
n
d
o
th
is
t
hr
ou
gh
t
he
L
IN
K
ID of a Primary
receiver displays.
In DUAL, a primary receiver
is link previously. Next, a
secondary receiver is link.
ID of a Secondary
receiver displays.
36
<Basic Operation>
11. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval) of
sensor data can be changed. If a DL interval
is increased, the response of the sensor data
display becomes slower, but stick response
will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s
* If there are many FASSTest systems turned on around your
receiver, it might not link to your transmitter. In this case,
HYHQLIWKHUHFHLYHUV/('VWD\VVROLG JUHHQXQIRUWXQDWHO\
the receiver might have established a link to one of other
transmitters. This is very dangerous if you do not notice
this situation. In order to avoid the problem, we strongly
recommend you to doublecheck whether your receiver is
really under control by your transmitter by giving the stick
input and then checking the servo response.
*Do not perform the linking operation when the drive motor
is connected or the engine is running.
* When you use two receivers, please be sure to setup a
"primary" and "secondary" in the "dual" mode.
*A telemetry function cannot be used for the 2nd receiver of
GXDOUHFHLYHUPRGH7KHYROWDJHDQG([WYROWDJHRIDQG
receiver cannot be known with a transmitter.
* You must link one receiver at a time. If both power
supplies to the receivers are switched on simultaneously,
data is received incorrectly by the transmitter.
* If a dual receiver function is used, in order to receive
sensor information correctly by both sets, telemetry data
will be slower compared to a single receiver setup.
* You cannot link three receivers.
/LQNLVUHTXLUHGZKHQDV\VWHPW\SHLVFKDQJHG
/LQNLQJLVUHTXLUHGZKHQHYHUDQHZPRGHOLVPDGH
Warning
After the linking is done, please cycle receiver
power and check that the receiver to be linked
is really under the control of the transmitter.
Do not perform the linking procedure with
motor's main wire connected or with the engine
operating as it may result in serious injury.
37
<Basic Operation>
Range Testing Your R/C System
,WLVH[WUHPHO\LPSRUWDQWWRUDQJHFKHFN\RXUPRGHOVSULRUWRHDFKIO\LQJVHVVLRQ7KLVHQDEOHV\RXWR
HQVXUHWKDWHYHU\WKLQJLVIXQFWLRQLQJDVLWVKRXOGDQGWRREWDLQPD[LPXPHQMR\PHQWIURP\RXUWLPHÀ\LQJ
The FX-22 transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a
range check.
Range check mode
We have installed a special "Range check
mode" for doing a ground range check. To access
the "Range check mode" touch and hold the RTN
button while turning on the transmitter. Doing so
ZLOOEULQJXS32:(502'(PHQX
To activate the "Range check mode" touch the
RTN button and the range check mode screen will
appear.
During this mode, the RF power output is
reduced so the range test can be performed. In
addition, when this mode is activated the right
/('RQWKHIURQWRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVWDUWVEOLQNLQJ
and the transmitter gives users a warning with a
beeping sound every 3 seconds.
The "Range check mode" continues for 90
seconds and after that the power will return
WRWKHQRUPDOOHYHO7RH[LWWKH5DQJHFKHFN
PRGHEHIRUHWKHVHFRQGVVHOHFWWKH5$1*(
&+(&.DWWKHWRSRIWKHVFUHHQDQGWRXFKWKH
RTN button again. This mode is available one
time only so if you need to re-use this function the
WUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUPXVWEHF\FOHG1(9(5VWDUW
À\LQJZKHQWKH5DQJHFKHFNPRGHLVDFWLYH
Should you require additional time to perform
a range check, highlight Restart before your time
H[SLUHVDQGSUHVVWKH571EXWWRQRQHWLPH
Range check procedure
1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk
away from the model while simultaneously
operating the controls. Have an assistant
stand by the model to confirm that all
controls are completely and correctly
operational. You should be able to walk
approximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return to
the model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet
accessible, location so it will be within reach
after starting the engine or motor. Be certain
the throttle stick is in the low throttle position,
then start the engine or motor. Perform
another range check with your assistant
holding the aircraft with the engine running
at various speeds. If the servos jitter or move
inadvertently, there may be a problem. We
would strongly suggest you do not Áy until the
source of the difÀculty has been determined.
Look for loose servo connections or binding
pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery
has been fully charged.
The present model
About 100 feet
Range check mode
Range checking on
low power.
Warning
'RQRWÀ\LQWKHUDQJHFKHFNPRGH
*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model
is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost and the
model will crash.
38
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
RECEIVER AND SERVO INSTALLATION
Receiver switch
Receiver battery
Charging port
Servos
R7008SB (output connector section)
sCH1~6: Output connectors 1~6
s"/UTPUTCONNECTORSAND0OWERSUPPLY
s3"/UTPUTCONNECTORSOR3"53SYSTEM
s3"533"53SYSTEM
CH1~8,
S.BUS/（2）,
B
Receiver and servos connection diagram
Always connect the necessary number of servos.
The receiver channel assignment depends on the
model type. See the Servo connection by model
type tables.
Receiver and servos connection
Connect the receiver and servos in accordance with the connection diagram shown below. Always read the
section [Before using]. When mounting the receiver and servos to the fuselage, connect the necessary points
in accordance with the model's instruction manual.
39
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
Servo connection by model type
The FX-22 transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type
selected with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for
each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignments can also be changed. For
more information, read the description of the Function menu.
Airplane/glider
Normal wing and V-tail
1Aileron 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2
Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX5 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3
6 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4
7 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap
8 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9 AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 VPP AUX1 VPP AUX1
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
1Aileron 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2
Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6
Elevator2 Elevator2
Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3
6 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4
7
Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2
Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap
8 AUX4 AUX4 VPP AUX5
Elevator2 Elevator2
Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9 AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 VPP AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1
Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
CH
CH
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 14CH FASST MULT
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 14CH FASST MULT
Ailvator (Dual Elevator)
The output
CH of each
system
The output
CH of each
system
40
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
Flying wing, Delta wing (Winglet 2 Rudder)
Flying wing, Delta wing
2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2 VPP AUX4 VPP AUX4 VPP AUX4 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Aileron3 Aileron3
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder VPP AUX4 Aileron4 Aileron4
5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap Flap Rudder Rudder
6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 VPP AUX4
7 AUX6 AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap
8 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9
Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
10 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly AUX1 Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
CH
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 14CH FASST MULT
2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Aileron3 Aileron3
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron4 Aileron4
5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap Flap Rudder Rudder
6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Rudder2 Rudder2
7 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap
8 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9
Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
10 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
CH
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 14CH FASST MULT
* Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels, there
is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function required out of
WKHUDQJHRIWKHDUURZRID¿JXUH
The output
CH of each
system
The output
CH of each
system
Airplane/glider
41
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
● FASSTest12CH
● FASSTest14CH/FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH/S-FHSS
CH
All Other H-4, H4X Swash
1 Aileron Aileron
2 Elevator Elevator
3 Throttle Throttle
4 Rudder Rudder
5 Gyro/RUD Gyro/RUD
6 Pitch Pitch
7 Governor Governor
8 Needle Elevator2
9 Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL
10 Gyro3/ELE Gyro3/ELE
11 AUX1 AUX1
12 AUX1 AUX1
DG1 SW SW
DG2 SW SW
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 14CH FASST MULT
CH
All Other H-4, H4X Swash
1 Aileron Aileron
2 Elevator Elevator
3 Throttle Throttle
4 Rudder Elevator2
5 Pitch Pitch
6 Gyro/RUD Gyro/RUD
7 Governor Governor
8 Governor 2 Rudder
9 Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL
10 Gyro3/ELE Gyro3/ELE
DG1 SW SW
DG2 SW SW
FASSTest 12CH
Helicopter
Ɣ6LQFHWKHFKGRHVQWZRUNRQWKHFKPRGHSOHDVHDVVLJQWKH
HOHYDWRU++;RUWKHQHHGOHDOORWKHUWRFKDQQQHOLIWKH
governor is not used.
The output
CH of each
system
The output
CH of each
system
42
<Model Basic Setting Procedure>
MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
1. Model addition and selection
Initially, the FX-22 assigns the first model to
model-01 in the transmitter. The Model Select
function of the Linkage Menu is used to add
models and to select amongst models which are
already set.
The FX-22 is capable of storing data for up to 30
models in its internal memory. Additional model
data can also be saved to an optional SD card.
The currently selected model name is displayed
LQWKHFHQWHURIWKHKRPHVFUHHQ%HIRUHÀ\LQJDQG
before changing any settings, always confirm the
model name.
When a new model is added, the Model type
select screen and System mode setup screen
automatically appear. Please be aware that the
transmitter will stop transmitting temporarily when
you change the model.
When a new model is added, you will need to re-
link the receiver.
2. Model type selection
Select the model type matched to the aircraft
with the Model Type select function of the Linkage
Menu. For an airplane, select the model type from
among the 2 types: airplane and glider. And then
select the wing type and the tail type matched to
the aircraft.
Airplane/glider basic setting procedure
3. Fuselage linkage
Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder,
etc. in accordance with the model's instruction
manual. For a description of the connection
method, see the Receiver and Servos Connection.
Note that even for the same "airplane
model", when the wing type and tail type
are different, the channel assignment may
be different. (The channel assigned to each
function can be checked at the Function
menu of the Linkage Menu.)
ŏ If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage Menu.
ŏ Adjust the neutral position and control
surface angle with the linkage, and fine
tune them with the Sub-Trim and End Point
functions (angle adjustment). To protect the
linkage, a limit position can also be set with
the End Point function. The End Point function
can adjust the amount of up/down and left/
right movement and limit of each channel.
4. Throttle cut setting (Airplane)
Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by a
switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle Cut function of
the Linkage Menu. After activating the throttle cut
function and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle
position so that the carburetor becomes fully closed.
For safety, the throttle cut function operates the
43
<Model Basic Setting Procedure>
throttle stick in the 1/3 or less (slow side) position.
5. Idle down setting (Airplane)
The idling speed can be lowered with one touch
by a switch without changing the throttle trim
position. Perform this setting with the Idle Down
function of the Linkage Menu. After activating the
Idle Down function and selecting the switch, adjust
the idle down speed. For safety, the idle down
function acts only when the throttle stick is in the
lowest part of its throw.
*While the Throttle Cut function is in operation, the Idle
Down function does not work.
6. D/R function
D/R function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of the stick functions (aileron,
elevator, rudder and throttle) for each switch
SRVLWLRQDLUSODQHRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQJOLGHU
7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHUWKHPRGHOHUKDVGH¿QHG
the maximum throw directions in the End Point
settings.
(Airplane)
(Glider)
7. Airbrake (Airplane)
This function is used when an airbrake is
necessary when taking off or diving, etc. Please
note: this menu item is only available under certain
ZLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV)RUH[DPSOHLWZLOOQRWDSSHDU
if a single aileron wing type has been selected.
7KHSUHVHWHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSRIIVHWDPRXQWFDQ
be activated by a switch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and
flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
VSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQ
be adjusted. You can also set the Auto Mode, which
will link Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A
separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the
ON/OFF switch.
$GGLWLRQRIÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV*OLGHU
The Condition Select function automatically
allocates the normal condition (NORMAL) for
each model. NORMAL is the default condition and
is the only one active when a new model type is
GH¿QHG
,I\RXZDQWWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVSOHDVHUHIHU
to a description of the CONDITION function.
*The NORMAL is always on, and remains on until other
conditions are activated by switches, stick positions, etc.
Please refer to the section entitled Switch Selection Method
for additional information on how to do so.
*It is possible to customize the activation of the flight
conditions.
*The Condition Delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition Delay is used to change the servo throw
smoothly when switching conditions.
44
<Model Basic Setting Procedure>
1. Model addition and selection
Initially, the FX-22 assigns the first model to
model-01 in the transmitter. To add new models
or to select a model already programmed, use the
Model Select function of the Linkage Menu.
This is convenient when selecting a model after
entering the model's names in advance. The FX-
22 is capable of storing up to 30 models in the
transmitter's internal memory. Additional models
can also be stored in an optional SD card.
The currently selected model is displayed in
the middle of the screen. Before flying and before
changing any settings, always confirm the model
name.
When a new model is added, the Model Type select
screen and system mode setup screen automatically
appear. Change, or check that they match the swash
type and receiver type of the model used.
When a new model is added, you will need to re-
link the receiver.
2. Model type and swash type selection
If a different model type is already selected,
select helicopter with the Model Type function of
the Linkage Menu, and then select the swash type
matched to the helicopter.
*The Model Type function automatically selects the
appropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing
Helicopter basic setting procedure
This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the FX-22. Adjust the actual values,
etc. to match the fuselage used.
functions for the chosen model type. Six swash types are
available for helicopters.
*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to the
MODEL TYPE function.
3. Flight condition addition
7KHWUDQVPLWWHURIIHUVXSWR¿YHÀLJKWFRnditions
per model.
The Condition Select function automatically
DOORFDWHV¿YHFRQGLWLRQVIRUKHOLFRSWHUV
(Initial setting)
ŏ NORMAL
ŏ IDLE UP1 (SW-E)
ŏ IDLE UP2 (SW-E)
ŏ IDLE UP3 (SW-F)
ŏHOLD (Hold switch is not assigned initially)
Note: Since you may accidentally activate
a condition that not previously setup during
ÁLJKWZKLFKFRXOGFDXVHDFUDVKZHVXJJHVW
deleting conditions that are not used.
*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to the
Condition Select function.
The NORMAL condition is always on, and
remains on until other conditions are activated by
switches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 3/idle up 2/
idle up 1/normal. Throttle hold has the highest
priority.
The Condition Delay can be programmed for
each channel and condition. The Condition Delay
is used to change the servo throw smoothly when
switching conditions.
*HQHUDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVHWWLQJH[DPSOH
ŏ Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)
Use from engine starting to hovering.
ŏ Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)
Use in stall turn, loop, and other maneuvers.
ŏ Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)
Use in rolls.
ŏ Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
Use in auto rotation.
45
<Model Basic Setting Procedure>
5. Throttle/Pitch curve setting
This function adjusts the throttle or pitch
operation curve in relation to the movement of the
throttle stick for each condition.
7KURWWOHFXUYHVHWWLQJH[DPSOH!
Activate the throttle curve of each condition with
the condition select switch.
ŏNormal curve adjustment
Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that the
engine speed is constant and up/down control is
easiest.
ŏIdle up curve adjustment
The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).
ŏThrottle hold curve adjustment
ConÀrm that the rate of the slowest position (0) of
the stick is 0 (initial setting).
<([DPSOHRISLWFKFXUYHVHWWLQJ!
Activate the pitch curve of each condition with
the condition select switch.
ŏPitch curve (Normal)
Make the pitch at hovering approximately 5
º
~6
º
.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50 point as the standard.
*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.
ŏPitch curve (Idle up 1)
The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve
matched to airborne Áight.
Set to -7
º
~12
º
as standard.
ŏPitch curve (Idle up 2)
The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is 8
º
.
ŏPitch curve (Hold)
At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at both
the high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7
º
~12
º
4. Servo Connection
Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator,
pitch, and other servos in accordance with the
kit instruction manual. For a description of the
connection method, see "Receiver and Servos
Connection".
Note: The channel assigned to each function
can be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage Menu.
ŏ If the direction of operation of the servo
is incorrect, use the Reverse function of
the Linkage Menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.
ŏ Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)
ŏ Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
ŏ Adjust the neutral position at the linkage side
and Àne tune with the Sub-Trim function and
End Point function. To protect the linkage,
a limit position can also be set with the End
Point function.
ŏ Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)
*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of the
linkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.
46
<Model Basic Setting Procedure>
function from the Model Menu, and set the curve
for each condition. (At initial setting, this function
is in the "INH" state. To use it, set it to the "ON"
state.)
6HWWLQJH[DPSOH!
Activate the mixing curve of each condition with
the condition select switch.
A curve setting example is shown below.
ŏPitch to RUD mixing curve (Normal)
Use the hovering system and set this curve to
match take off and landing and vertical climb at a
constant speed.
ŏPitch to RUD mixing (Idle up 1)
Use this curve in stall turn, loop, and adjust it so the
fuselage is facing straight ahead when heading
into the wind.
ŏPitch to RUD mixing (Hold)
This function is set so that the fuselage is facing
straight ahead at straight line auto rotation. The
pitch of the tail rotor becomes nearly 0
º
.
9. Throttle hold setting
*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the THR HOLD
function.
10. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
HQJLQHE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFN
at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle
to avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s
location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults
to NULL.
*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until the
engine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not
binding.
6ZDVK0L[FRUUHFWVDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQG
pitch interaction
The swash mix function is used to correct the
swash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic)
and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction
corresponding to each operation of each condition.
6. D/R function
D/R function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for
each condition.
*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the afore-
mentioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"
7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QG3RLQWKDVGH¿QHG
the maximum throw directions.
*\URVHQVLWLYLW\DQGPRGHVZLWFKLQJ
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching
function is utilized to adjust the gyro mixing of the
model, and can be set for each condition.
ŏ Normal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximum
ŏ Idle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimum
ŏ However, during auto rotations with a tail-
driven helicopter, this function may not have
any effect on the high gyro sensitivity.
3LWFKWR58'PL[LQJVHWWLQJ
Note: When using a Futaba GY Gyro, or other
heading hold gyro, this Pitch to RUD mixing
should not be used. The reaction torque is
corrected by the gyro. When operating the
gyro in the AVCS mode, the mixed signal will
cause neutral deviation symptoms and the
gyro will not operate normally.
Use this function when you want to suppress
the torque generated by the changes in the pitch
and speed of the main rotor during pitch operation.
Adjust it so that the nose does not swing in the
rudder direction. However, when using a heading
hold gyro like those shown above, do not use Pitch
to rudder mixing.
Activate the Pitch to rudder (Pit
→
RUD) mixing
47
<Model Basic Setting Procedure>
7KURWWOHPL[LQJVHWWLQJ
*If throttle mixing is necessary for a compensation for
slowing of engine speed caused by swash plate operation
during aileron or elevator operation, please refer to the
THROTTLE MIX function.
2WKHUVSHFLDOPL[LQJV
ŏPitch to Needle mixing
This mixing is used with engines with a design which
allows needle control during flight (fuel-air mixture
adjustment). A needle curve can be set.
ŏGovernor mixing
This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when a
governor is used.
48
<Functions of System Menu>
SYSTEM MENU
System Menu functions table
[TRAINER]: Starts and sets the trainer system.
[DISPLAY]: LCD and back-light adjustment
[USER NAME]: User name registration
[SOUND]: Turns off the buzzer.
[H/W SET]: H/W reverse, calibration and stick mode
[START SEL.]: Immediately, a model selection can be performed
[AUTO LOCK]: The automatic lock function of two kinds of touch sensors
[INFO]: Displays the program version, SD card information, product ID, and language selection.
[SBUS SERVO]: S.BUS servo setting.
The System Menu sets up functions of the
transmitter: This does not set up any model data.
ŏ Call the system menu shown below by
touching the SYS button twice at the home
screen, etc.
ŏ Select [SYSTEM MENU]
and return to the home
screen by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
ŏAccess setup screen
<SensorTouch™>
ŏ Select the function you want to set and call
the setup screen by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
RETURN
49
<Functions of System Menu>
TRAINER
Trainer system starting and setting
FX-22 trainer system makes it possible for the
instructor to chose which channels and operation
modes that can be used in the students transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can be
set, the training method can also be matched to
the student's skill level. Two transmitters must be
connected by an optional Trainer Cord, and the
Instructors’ transmitter should be programmed for
trainer operation, as described below.
When the Instructor activates the trainer switch,
the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/
FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor
can make corrections while the student has control).
When the switch is released the Instructor regains
control. This is very useful if the student gets the
aircraft into an undesirable situation.
ŏ Setting data are stored to model data.
ŏ Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/FUNC/
NORM mode.
ŏ Activated student channels can be selected
by switches.
NOTE: This trainer system can be used in the
following manner;
1. With the FX-22 transmitter and a conventional
transmitter, if the channel order is different,
it is necessary to match the channel order
before using this function.
You can select the channel of input data
from student's transmitter in the "FUNC" or
"MIX" mode.
2. When the FX-22 is used as the instructor’s
transmitter, set the modulation mode of the
student’s transmitter to PPM.
If being used as the student, FX-22 can be
connected to the instructor's transmitter which
the PPM mode as the student's modulation
mode is required. FX-22 always sends PPM
mode signal from the trainer jack.
(In the case of student's transmitters other than
2.4 GHz)
3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in
ERWKWUDQVPLWWHUVEHIRUHÁ\LQJ
Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters
Instructor's transmitter settings Student's transmitter settings
System Type Trainer setting System Type Trainer setting Trainer Cords
Instructor Student Mod. mode CH mode Mod. mode CH mode Mod. mode
FX-22/
T18M=/14SG
FX-22/
T18M=/14SG
Arbitrary 16CH Arbitrary 16CH -
T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords
FX-22
T14M=, FX-40,
T12=, T12FG,
FX-30
Arbitrary 12CH
PCM-G3
2.4G
12CH PPM
FX-22 T8FG, FX-20 Arbitrary
12CH FASST-MLT2
--
8CH FASST-MULT
FX-22
T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX,
T4EX
Arbitrary 8CH PPM - - T12FG
FX-22 T10CG,T7C Arbitrary 8CH Arbitrary - - T12FG
FX-22 T8-,T6- Arbitrary 8CH Arbitrary - -
T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords
T14M=, FX-40,
T12=, T12FG,
FX-30
FX-22 Arbitrary 12CH Arbitrary 12CH -
T8FG, FX-20 FX-22 Arbitrary 12CH Arbitrary 12CH -
T10C, T10CG,
T9C, T7C,
T7C,T8-
FX-22 Arbitrary - Arbitrary 8CH -
50
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
Mode and switch selection
1. Access the setup screen page 4 shown
below by touching the S1 button three times.
2. Move the cursor to the [ACT] or [16/12/8CH]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
3. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN
button to change the mode. (To terminate
the mode change, touch the S1 button.)
"ACT": Enable operation by changing to [OFF]
or [ON].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the FX-
22, T18M=, select [16CH]. When the student
uses the T14M=, T12=, T12FG or FX-40, select
[12CH]. Otherwise select [8CH].
If changing the trainer switch:
4. Move the cursor to the [SW] item and touch
the RTN button to access the switch setup
screen.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end of
this manual for selection method details.)
"SW": Select the desired switch.
Initial setting: SH
*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the ON
position on the switch setup screen. When [ALTERNATE
OFF] is selected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed.
When [ALTERNATE ON] is selected, the trainer function
is alternately turned on and off each time the switch is
operated. This allows alternate ON/OFF switching even
when a momentary switch (SH) is used.
ŏ Select [TRAINER] in the System menu and enter the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Note: The trainer function won’t be turned
on unless the Instructor's transmitter receives
signals from the student's transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting your
trainer cable.
Operating mode selection
(Setup screen page 1-3)
1. Move the cursor to the [MODE] item of the
channel you want to change and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN
button to change the mode. (To terminate
the mode change, touch the S1 button.)
"MODE": Select the desired operation mode
for each channel.
NORM: The model is controlled by signals from the student
transmitter.
MIX mode: The model is controlled by signals from the
instructor and student transmitters. (Reset the student's
model data to the default condition.)
FUNC mode (function mode): The model is controlled by
signals from the student transmitter with the instructor 's
setting. (Reset the student's model data to the default
condition.)
OFF: Only the instructor side operates.
Adjusting the student's rate.
*This can be adjusted for students who may need lower rates
than a more experienced student.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
51
<Functions of System Menu>
1. Move the cursor to the [RATE] item of the
channel you want to change and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
"RATE": Adjust the desired rate.
Setting range: 0~100
Initial value: 100
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.
3. To end adjustment, touch the RTN button
and return to the cursor mode.
Changing the student's channel
*The setting above allows setting of the channel assignment
of student side when [MIX] or [FUNC] was selected.
1. Move the cursor to the [STU. CH] item of the
channel you want to change and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the channel by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. Touch the RTN
button to change the channel. (To terminate
the mode change, touch the S1 button.)
"STU. CH": Match the channel order of the
Instructor's and student's transmitter. This
function will help if both transmitters are in
different modes, or the Master has a different
wing type set up. The student can be set
to match the Master without any physical
changes being made.
52
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
LCD contrast adjustment
1. Select "CONTRAST" and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the contrast by scrolling the touch sensor.
"CONTRAST": Adjust the contrast to the
desired value while watching the screen
display.
Setting range: (Lighter) 0 to 15 (Darker)
Initial value: 5
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.
2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Back-light brightness adjustment
1. Select "BRIGHTNESS" and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode and
adjust the back-light brightness by scrolling
the touch sensor.
"BRIGHTNESS": Adjust the brightness to the
desired value while watching the screen
display.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 20(Lighter)
Initial value: 10
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.
DISPLAY
LCD and back-light adjustment, unit system
LCD contrast, back-light brightness and back-
light off-timer adjustment are possible:
Moreover, a display unit can be chosen from the
metric system or yard/pound.
2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Back-light off-timer
1. Select "OFF TIMER" and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the back-light off-timer by scrolling the touch
sensor.
"OFF TIMER": Adjust the time when the back-
light turns off after operating the touch
sensor.
Setting range: 10 to 240 sec (each 10 sec),
OFF (always on)
Initial value: 10 sec
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch
the RTN button for one second.
2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Unit system adjustment
1. Select "UNIT SYS." and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the unit by scrolling the touch sensor.
Setting range: (METRIC) or (YARD/POUND)
2. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
ŏ Select [DISPLAY] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value
53
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
USER NAME
User name registration
This function allows the modelers to change the
FX-22 user name.
*A name of up to 10 characters can be entered as the user
name. Please note that a space is also counted as one
character.
User name registration
1. Change the user name as described below:
[Moving cursor in user name (candidate)]
Select [ł] or [ń], and touch the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button
is touched, the character immediately after
the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from the
character list and the RTN button is touched,
that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the
user name. (A space is also counted as 1 character.)
2. Upon completing the input, select [ENTER]
and touch the RTN button. (To terminate
input and return to the original state, select
[CANCEL] and touch the RTN button.)
(Character list 1/3)
(Character list 2/3)
(Character list 3/3)
ŏ Select [USER NAME] at the System menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
User name (candidate)
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
54
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SOUND
Turns off the buzzer.
The warning sound and other sounds of the FX-
22 transmitter can be turned off.
*When “WARNING” was set to OFF, the no operation alarm
(30 minutes), mixing warning sound, and low battery alarm
sounds also turned off.
ŏ Select [SOUND] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
On/off operation
1. Move the cursor to the [TIMER][WARNING]
or [OTHER SOUND] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the ON or OFF by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
3.Touch the RTN button.
Phone Volume
1. "SPEECH" is set to ACT on the alarm setting
screen of a sensor to hear a sound from.
2. A cursor is moved to the numerical value of
PONE VOLUME, and RTN is touched.
3.Volume is chosen by scrolling.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏThe setting range is from 0 to 30.
0 is silence.
55
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
Operation direction reversal method
1. Select [H/W REVERSE] and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
2. Move the cursor to the item corresponding
to the H/W (hardware) you want to reverse
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
3. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. When the RTN
button is touched, the operation direction is
reversed. (To terminate the mode change,
touch the S1 button.)
"NORM": Normal operation direction
"REV" : Operation direction is reversed.
H/W SETTING
Hardware reverse and stick mode
H/W reverse
This function reverses the operation direction of
the sticks, switches, trimmer levers, and knobs.
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
signal, but does not change the display
indicators. Use the Normal mode as long as
there is no special reason to use the Reverse
mode.
Stick mode
This function changes the stick mode of
transmitter.
Note: This will not change the throttle ratchet,
etc. Those are mechanical changes that
must be performed by a Futaba service
center.
Note: After changing the mode, these changes
are only applied to new models. It is not
applied to an existing model.
Stick calibration
J1-J4 stick correction can be performed.
ŏ Select [H/W SET] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Changing stick mode
1.Select [STICK MODE] and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
2. Move the cursor to the "STICK MODE" item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
3. Select the mode. The display blinks. When
the RTN button is touched, the stick mode is
changed. (To terminate the mode change,
touch the S1 button.)
(J1)
(J2)
(J4)
(J3)
Mode -1 -2 -3 -4
1 Aileron Throttle Elevator Rudder
2 Aileron Elevator Throttle Rudder
3 Rudder Throttle Elevator Aileron
4 Rudder Elevator Throttle Aileron
ŏAccess setup screen
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
56
<Functions of System Menu>
Stick calibration method
*J3 and J4 correction is described below. J1 and J2
corrections are performed using the same procedure.
1.Select [CALIBRATION] and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
2.Move the cursor to the -3--4 button and
touch the RTN button.
3.Move the -3 or -4 sticks to the neutral position
and press the RTN button for one second.
4.Set the -3 and -4 sticks fully to the bottom
right and wait until the buzzer sounds.
5.Set the -3 and -4 sticks fully to the top left and
wait until the buzzer sounds.
6.The above completes the correction
operation. Operate and check if stick
correction was performed normally.
Switch Position change method
1.Select [SWITCH] and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN button.
2.Move the cursor to the switch to change.
And touching the RTN button.
3. Select the position by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
4.Touch the RTN button.
57
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
Setting Up and Adjusting the Quick Select Models
1. The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu is
accessed through the FX-22 System Menu.
Turn the transmitter ON and then press the
SYS (System) button two times. Use the
SensorTouch to highlight the Start Selection
(START SEL.) and then press the Return (RTN)
button to conÀrm the selection.
2.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu option
defaults to OFF meaning that 4uick Select
and Model Select are not applicable. To
activate the 4uick Select or Model Select,
use the SensorTouch to scroll to the OFF
setting as denoted in the image. With the
OFF indication highlighted, press the Return
(RTN) button and rotate the SensorTouch once
again to scroll amongst the options. With the
4uick Select (4UICK SEL.) indicated, press the
Return (RTN) button once again to make the
desired selection as indicated.
Quick Select Activation:
With the Quick Select (QUICK SEL.) option
activated, there are two additional options available
for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model).
These options determine if/when the Quick Select
information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS,
as the name suggests, indicates that each time
the transmitter is powered-up, the Quick Select
information will appear on-screen. The MDL
(Model) setting indicates that the Quick Select
information will appear on-screen only when
the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the
transmitter is turned ON. With the Quick Select
mode highlighted, use the SensorTouch to move to
the activation setting options. Model (MDL) is the
default setting. Press the Return (RTN) button to
bring forth the options, then scroll to the ALWAYS
setting using the SensorTouch pad. Press the Return
571EXWWRQRQFHDJDLQWR¿QDOL]HWKHVHOHFWLRQ
START SEL is a function which starts and can
perform a model selection immediately.
Each time, it is convenient for the modeler
which is enjoying two or more models by one of a
transmitter.
Quick Select Screen
As the name suggests, the Quick Model Select
Function enables the modeler to change the
selected models rapidly each time the transmitter is
turned ON. With a few quick touches, it is possible
to change models whereas before it would require
a multi-step process. The FX-22 stores up to four
models in the Quick Select offerings.
Model Select Screen
When the transmitter is turned on, it will open to
the Model Selection Screen immediately.
START SEL.
Immediately, a model selection can be performed
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
58
<Functions of System Menu>
Assigning models to the sensor buttons:
There are four sensors/buttons that correspond
with the SensorTouch: Link (LNK), Model (MDL)
System (SYS) and S1. As such, it is possible to offer
up to four models available through the Quick Select
IXQFWLRQ:HVXJJHVWXVLQJWKHPRGHOVWKDW\RXÀ\
most often.
1. Use the SensorTouch, scroll to the desired
sensor/button for the Àrst model; for example,
Link (LNK).
2. With the input next to the desired sensor
highlighted, press the Return (RTN) button one
time.
3. Using the SensorTouch, scroll through the
available models. To select the desired
model, press the Return (RTN) button.
4. Repeat as desired for the remaining sensors.
Using the sensors to select the model:
1. Turn ON the transmitter, activating the
4uick Select screen. If Model (MDL) has
been selected, please be sure to press the
Model (MDL) sensor when powering up the
transmitter.
* Please note: Even if the Quick Select function is active, the
Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned
ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button.
2. To select the model assigned to a particular
sensor, double-click the desired sensor. For
example, MODEL- 03 is assigned to S1, double-
click S1 to bring forth all settings, etc. for Model
-03. The FX-22 offers an audible and visual
conÀrmation as the selected model memory is
changed accordingly.
* If the Return (RTN) button is double-clicked, the FX-22 the
current model is selected as indicated on the display. That is,
the model that was used prior to the last time the transmitter
was turned OFF.
Model Select Screen
This allows the Model Select screen to be accessed
immediately upon turning ON the transmitter.
* Please note: this function cannot be utilized at the same time
as the Quick Select function. If more than four models are
ÀRZQUHJXODUO\ZHVXJJHVWWKDWWKH0RGHO6HOHFWIXQFWLRQEH
utilized as it will save time when selecting the desired aircraft.
,IIRXURUIHZHUPRGHOVDUHÀRZQWKH4XLFN6HOHFWRSWLRQ
would be the best choice.
* Please note: the Model Select function does not allow access
to the RENAME, COPY or DELETE options. To utilize one
of these options, please access the Model Select screen in
the typical manner as described in the complete instruction
manual.
1.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu is
accessed through the FX-22·s System Menu.
Turn the transmitter ON and then press the
SYS (System) button two times. Use the
SensorTouch to highlight the Start Selection
(START SEL.) and then press the Return (RTN)
button to conÀrm the selection.
2. The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu option
defaults to OFF meaning that 4uick Select
and Model Select are not applicable. To
activate the 4uick Select or Model Select, use
the SensorTouch to scroll to the OFF setting as
denoted in the image. With the OFF indication
highlighted, press the Return (RTN) button and
rotate the SensorTouch once again to scroll
to the Model Select (MODEL SEL.). Press the
Return (RTN) button once again to activate
Model Select as indicated.
Model Select Activation:
With the Model Select (MODEL SEL.) option
activated, there are two additional options available
for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model).
These options determine if/when the Model Select
information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS,
as the name suggests, indicates that each time
the transmitter is powered-up, the Model Select
information will appear on-screen. The MDL
(Model) setting indicates that the Model Select
information will appear on-screen only when
the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the
transmitter is turned ON.
With the Model Select mode highlighted, use the
59
<Functions of System Menu>
SensorTouch to move to the activation setting
options. Model (MDL) is the default setting. Press
the Return (RTN) button to bring forth the options,
then scroll to the ALWAYS setting using the
SensorTouch pad. Press the Return (RTN) button
RQFHDJDLQWR¿QDOL]HWKHVHOHFWLRQ
Using the Model Select Function:
1. Turn ON the transmitter, activating the
Model Select screen. If Model (MDL) has
been selected, please be sure to press the
Model (MDL) sensor when powering up the
transmitter.
*Please note: Even if the Model Select function is active, the
Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned
ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button.
2. The SensorTouch is used to select amongst
the on-screen models. The current model
will automatically be highlighted when the
transmitter is turned ON. If a different model is
desired, use the SensorTouch to scroll through
the available options; each highlighted
accordingly. Again, to select a model, press
the Return (RTN) button accordingly. The FX-
22 offers an audible and visual conÀrmation as
the selected model memory is changed.
60
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
● Lock release
Every lock function's touch [ 1 second
or more ] of S1 button will release the
lock.
● Lock release
Every lock function's touch [ 1 second
or more ] of HOME/EXIT button will
release the lock.
● Manual lock
If S1 button is touched 1 second or more
from a HOME/TELEM.MONI screen, a
SensorTouch locks manually.
● Manual lock
If HOME/EXIT button is touched 1 second
or more from a HOME/TELEM.MONI screen,
a SensorTouch locks manually.
● Display of a lock
If locked, there will be sound and the
icon of a key will come out.
Auto lock method
1. Open the Auto lock screen in the system
menu.
2. Adjust the activation timer for the Auto
Lock function. The timer will begin counting
immediately when the HOME screen is not
used. The timer is adjustable in one second
increments up to 30 seconds. If the timer
value is OFF, this function is not applicable.
3.The Start Lock setting will, if enabled,
automatically lock the FX-22 when the
transmitter is powered up. To allow access to
the transmitter's functions, press and hold the
S1 key for one second.
*If neither the Lock Timer or Start Lock functions are active
(OFF), then the key lock remains even if the power is turned off.
*If the Lock Timer is enabled and the Start Lock is off, the key
lock status is canceled each time the FX-22 is turned on.
The Auto Lock function makes it possible to lock
the transmitter to prevent any unwanted input from
\RXUKDQGVZKLOHÀ\LQJ
The auto lock function can be set in two ways.
LOCK TIMER
Auto Lock functions automatically when there
is no operation from the HOME/TELEM.MONI
screen display for a chosen number of seconds.
START LOCK
Auto Lock functions automatically when the
model changes or power is turned on.
*To temporarily allow access to the FX-22 programming
press and hold the S1 or HOME/EXIT bitton for one second.
Please note, the Auto Lock function timer will resume
immediately once again.
*Also in a lock, the change of a HOME
⇔
TELEM.MONI
screen is possible with a HOME/EXIT button.
AUTO LOCK
The automatic lock function of two kinds of SensorTouch
Danger
It is recommended to Lock the
6HQVRU7RXFKGXULQJÀLJKWWRSUHYHQW
any accidental touches which could
change settings and cause an accident.
61
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
INFO
Displays the program version, SD card information, and product ID.
The FX-22 system program version information,
SD card information (current and maximum
QXPEHURIPRGHOGDWDDQGRWKHU¿OHVDQGSURGXFW
ID are displayed on the Information screen.
*When the SD card is not inserted, the SD card information is
not displayed.
The language displayed in home, menu, and
setup screen is selectable.
ŏ Select [INFO] at the system menu and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Information
"PRODUCT": Product ID number
"RF ID": RF ID number
"LANGUAGE": The language used in FX-22
"VERSION": FX-22 system program version
information
"AREA": Area which can use FX-22
"CARD SI=E": Current/Maximum number of
model data and other Àles (SD card)
Language selection
1. Move the cursor to the "LANGUAGE" item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2. Change the language by scrolling the touch
sensor. The display blinks. When the RTN
button is touched, the language is changed.
(To terminate the change, turn the EDIT dial
or push the S1 button.)
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
62
<Functions of System Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SBUS servo setting.
An S.BUS servo can memorize the channel
and various settings you input. Servo setting
can be performed on the FX-22 screen by
wiring the servo as shown in the figure.
ŏ Select [SOUND] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
Servo ID number
Individual ID numbers are memorized for your
S.BUS(2) servos in your FX-22. When a servo is
used, the servo ID number is automatically read by
the transmitter.
If you use multiple S.BUS(2) servos
and do not want to change the settings on all that are
mounted in a fuselage, only the desired servo in the
JURXS FDQ EHVHW E\ HQWHULQJ WKH,' RI WKDWVSHFL¿F
servo.
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions with
cannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display screen
will change.
(Only the function which can be used by a servo is displayed.)
* After reading completion, with connection of the above
¿JXUHLIDVWLFNLVPRYHGWKHWHVWRIRSHUDWLRQRIWKHVHUYR
can be operated and carried out.
Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting
1. Select [S
.
BUS SERVO] of the System Menu.
2. Wire the servo as shown in the Àgure above.
3. Press [RECALL] on page 3(S1 is pushed twice).
The ID and current setting of that servo are
displayed. ([RECALL] is chosen
⇒
RTN is
pushed
⇒
RTN is pushed for 1 second)
4. When multiple servos are connected change
[INH] at the right side of the ID number on the
screen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [WRITE] on page 3([WRITE] is
chosen
⇒
RTN is pushed
⇒
RTN is pushed for 1
second). The settings are changed.
Push [INIT.], if you would like to initialize a
setup of a servo. ([INIT.] is chosen
⇒
RTN is
pushed
⇒
RTN is pushed for 1 second)
S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo
FX-22
SBUS SERVO
63
<Functions of System Menu>
S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter
*There are a function which can be used according to the kind of servo, and an impossible function.
• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.
• Channel
Channel of the
S.BUS
system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.
• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.
• Servo type
When “Retractable” is selected and the servo has been continuously stopped for 30 seconds, the dead band
expands and unnecessary hold current due to external force is eliminated. When a new control signal enters,
normal operation is resumed. When using the servo as a landing gear servo, select “Retractable”. Also adjust the
servo travel to match the landing gear movement range.
• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, the first initial
movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the specified position.
• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold" mode setting holds the
servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.
• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smooth setting is
used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.
• Neutral Offset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel is restricted
on one side.
• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matched without
being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not be exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servos
operating voltage is increased.
• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be specified.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small
ĺ
Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal change.
Large
ĺ
Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current consumption will
increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.
• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.
• Boost
The minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small travel does
not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be immediately started by
adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small
ĺ
Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large
ĺ
Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too large, operation will
become rough.
64
<Functions of System Menu>
• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)
ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)
• Damper
The characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value is
larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,
depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs even though the
Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to a value larger than the
initial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small
ĺ
When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large
ĺ
When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like the servo response has
worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo will also
be shortened.
• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target position
when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small
ĺ
Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large
ĺ
Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.
• Buzzer
When the power supply of a servo is previously turned on at the time of a power supply injection without taking
transmit of a transmitter, the buzzer sound of about 2.5 Hz continues sounding from a servo.
(Even when the transmit of a transmitter is taken out previously, a buzzer becomes until the signal of a servo is
outputted normally, but it is not unusual.)
The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply
→
The buzzer sound of about 1.25 Hz
continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(
Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may sound
by incorrect recognition.
)
＊
Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more than needed or
do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.
65
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU
The Linkage Menu is made up of functions
which perform model addition, model type
selection, system type, end point setting, and other
model basic settings.
The functions which can be selected depend on
the model type. A typical menu screen is shown
below.
*The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.
Linkage Menu functions table
[SERVO]: Displays the servo test and operation position
[MODEL SEL]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting
[MODEL TYPE]: Model type, wing type, swash type, etc. selection
[SYSTEM]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, area mode selection
[FUNCTION]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed
[SUB-TRIM]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo
[REVERSE]: Reverses the servo travel direction
[FAIL SAFE]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting
[END POINT]: Servo travel adjustment and limit setting
[SERVO SPEED]: Speed setup of a servo
[THR CUT]: Stops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only)
[IDLE DOWN]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine (airplane only)
>6:$6+5,1*@/LPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRZLWKLQD¿[HGUDQJHKHOLFRSWHURQO\
[SWASH]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only)
[T1-T4 SET.]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim
[WARNING]: Mixing warning normal reset
[TELEM.SET.]: Displays voice software, and a setup of a voice interval.
[TELEMETRY]: Displays various data sent from the receiver.
[SENSOR]: Various telemetry sensors setting
[DATA RESET]: Model memory set data reset
ŏ Access the Linkage menu shown below by
tapping the LNK button two times.
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
*
ŏ Select the function you want to set and call
the setup screen by touching the RTN button.
ŏCalling setup screen
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
RETURN
66
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SERVO MONITOR
Servo Test Graph Display / Displays servo positions.
This is used for testing servo movement.
“Moving Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral
7HVW´¿[HGSRVLWLRQPRGHDUHDYDLODEOH
The “Neutral Test” is good for finding the
neutral position of a servo horn.
In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
LQDFFHVVLEOHXQGHUFHUWDLQFRQGLWLRQV6SHFL¿FDOO\
the Servo Test function is not operational if the
throttle cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter
modes; or if the throttle hold is ON in helicopter
mode.
ŏ Select [SERVO] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏ A [U.MENU/MON.] button is pushed once from a
home screen.
Servo test operation
1. Move the cursor to the [OFF] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the test mode by scrolling the touch
sensor and touch the RTN button. The display
blinks. Touch the RTN button to change the
mode. (To terminate mode change, touch
the S1 button.)
[MOVING]: Mode which repeats operation of
each servo
[NEUTRAL]: Mode which locks each servo in
the neutral position
2. Move the cursor to the [MOVING] or
[NEUTRAL] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the [OFF] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button. Testing is stopped.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
67
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
MODEL SELECT
The Model Selection function performs model addition, selection,
deletion, copy, and model name setting.
This function is used to load the settings of the
desired model into the FX-22’s memory.
The settings may be selected from either the
transmitter’s internal memory or an SD card.
Remember that up to 30 model memories are available
in the transmitter.
The name of the model stored in the transmitter and
the SD card may be changed. This can be very useful
to tell different models settings apart. Each model name
can be as long as 10 characters, and the model name
always appears in the display screen.
The Copy function is used to copy parameters,
settings, etc. from one model data into a second
memory. It may be used for getting a head-start on
setting up models with almost the same settings (only
GLIIHUHQFHVQHHGWREHPRGL¿HGLQVWHDGRIHQWHULQJWKH
complete model from scratch). Also, this function may
be used to make a backup copy of a model setup before
any changes are made.
*FX-22 can use the model data of FX-20 for SD card,
copying it. However, the model data of FX-22 cannot be
used by FX-20.
Model selection
*Model data saved on the transmitter memory other than the
model currently used can be selected.
1. Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: SD card
2. After moving the cursor to the desired model
in the model list, touch the RTN button.
3. Move to [SELECT].
4.Touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message is displayed. Touch the RTN button
for one second and selection is complete.
*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.
Model addition
*A new model can be added to the transmitter memory. It can
not be added to the SD card.
1. Move the cursor to [NEW].
2. Touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears. Touch the RTN button for
one second.
*The model type setup screen and frequency setup screen are
DXWRPDWLFDOO\GLVSOD\HG&RQ¿UPRUFKDQJHWKHPRGHOW\SH
and SYSTEM mode.
*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.
*The added model appears in the model list of the model
select setup screen.
*Link is required when a new model is
made from a model selection.
ŏ Select [MODEL SELECT] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
*The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
(Model list)
Current model
68
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
Model deletion
*The model stored in the transmitter memory or an SD card
can be deleted.
*The current model can not be deleted.
1. Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: SD card
2. Move the cursor to the model you want to
delete in the model list and then touch the
RTN button.
3. Move the cursor to [DELETE].
4. Touch the RTN button. When a conÀrmation
message is displayed and the RTN button
is touched for one second, the model is
deleted.
Model name change
*The model name of the model stored in the transmitter
memory or a SD card can be changed.
1. If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: SD card
2. Move the cursor to the model you want to
change in the model list and then touch the
RTN button.
3. Move to [RENAME].
4. Touch the RTN button.
*The model name setup screen is displayed.
User name (candidate)
5. Change the model name as described
below:
[Moving cursor in the user name (candidate)]
Select [ł] or [ń], and touch the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button
is touched, the character immediately after
the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from the
character list and the RTN button is touched,
that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the
model name. (A space is also counted as one character.)
6. After the desired information has been input,
select [ENTER] and touch the RTN button.
(To terminate input and return to the original
state, select [CANCEL] and touch the RTN
button.)
Model copy
*A copy can be made of the model stored in the transmitter
memory or an SD card.
1. If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: SD card
2. Select the model you want to copy in the
model list and then touch the RTN button.
3. Move to [COPY].
4. Touch the RTN button.
*The copy screen appears.
5. If replacing the model stored in the
transmitter memory:
Move to [ADD-LIST] and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Select the destination model by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button.
[ADD-LIST]: adding the model to the list
[(model name)]: replacing the model
*The model stored in the SD card can be replaced.
If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the copy destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button.
6. Move to [COPY].
7. Touch the RTN button. When a conÀrmation
message is displayed and the RTN button is
touched for one second, the model data is
copied.
69
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
MODEL TYPE
This function selects the model type from among airplane, helicopter,
and glider.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Six swash types are available for helicopters.
Six types of main wings and three types of tail
wings are available for airplanes and gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for each
model type are set in advance at the factory.
Note: The Model Type function automatically
selects the appropriate output channels,
control functions, and mixing functions for the
chosen model type.
When the Model Type selection command
is accessed, all of the data in the active
memory is cleared (except the following
swash type.) Be sure that you don’t mind
losing this data, or back it up to another
memory using the copying functions.
When changing the helicopter swash type
within the following groups, you can leave
the settings other than the SWASH function.
However, this is initialized when you change
the swash type to the other swash type
group.
Model type selection
1. Move the cursor to the item you want to
change and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Select the desired type by scrolling the
touch sensor and touch the RTN button. A
confirmation message appears. Touch the
RTN button for one second.
Move to [YES] and Touch the RTN button for
one second.
(To terminate input and return to the original
state, touch the S1 button or select [NO] and
touch the RTN button.)
"TYPE": Model type
"WING " (airplane/glider): Wing type
"TAIL" (airplane/glider): Tail type
"SWASH" (helicopter): Swash type
*The wing types which can be selected depend on the mode;
FASST, Multi-ch, or 7ch, etc.
ŏ Select [MODEL TYPE] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
2. If resetting the data when changing the
helicopter swash type:
(Helicopter)
Move the cursor to [OFF] and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select [ON] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears. Touch the RTN button.
Activate the swash type setting. The swash
setting parameters are reset.
Swash type group A:
H-1, H-3, HR3, and HE3
Swash type group B:
H-4, H-4X
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
70
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
Model type selection (Airplane, Glider)
Ɣ:LQJW\SH1RUPDO
Ɣ:LQJW\SH7DLOOHVVZLQJ
Ɣ5XGGHUW\SH
Ɣ7DLOW\SH
Model type selection (Helicopter)
Ɣ6ZDVKW\SH
71
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
System Type selection
The FX-22 is for 2.4GHz only. The system can
be changed from among 5 choices: FASSTest
14CH, FASSTest 12CH, FASST MULTI,
FASST 7CH, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest14CH and
FASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7008SB
set. The method of selection is to the next page.
*If you change the System Type, other model data is not
reset.
*If a system type is changed in helicopter mode, the
transmitter will offer two selections:
[Yes] : Selection sets the channel order suitable for System
Type. (We recommend here. )
[No] : The present channel order is maintained.
*After any change, remember to test the model and should
fully check servo direction and a motion.
*Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the
SYSTEM
System mode setting, Receiver link
Area mode selection (Frequency range)
The FX-22 transmitter has been designed to
function in many countries. If you will be utilizing
this transmitter in a country other than France,
please make sure that [AREA] is set to "G". If,
however, this transmitter will be utilized in France,
it must be set to "F" in order to comply with French
regulations.FASST mode selection
Receiver linking
The receiver will only be controlled (without
being affected by other transmitters) by the
transmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver
other than one purchased as a set, linking is
necessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a new
model is added by model selection, and the time of
system type change.
FASSTest 12CH mode.
Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH
mode)
Dual receivers can be linked with the FX-22.
Two receivers are recognized individually by ID
numbers. For example, in R7008SB, CH output
setting function is used, by setting the first as as
"1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-14CH", two
sets of receivers can be used as a set in the model,
allowing you 14 channels. If a Dual receiver
function is used, the following function can set up
individually.
・
Battery fail-safe voltage setup
A telemetry function cannot be used for the 2nd
receiver.
The voltage and Ext voltage of a 2nd
receiver cannot be known with a transmitter.
Battery fail-safe voltage setup (only FASSTest
mode)
The voltage which battery fail-safe activates,
can be set when you link. (3.5-8.4V) The receiver
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Suggested setting voltages are as follows.
• 4 cells NiCd or NiMH (Normal: 4.8v) = 3.8 v
• 2 cells LiFe (Normal: 6.6 v) = 6.0 ~ 6.2 v
• 2 cells LiPo (Normal: 7.4 v) = 7.2 ~ 7.4 v
It is a rough reference value.
Since it changes with servos carried in the
condition and the model of a battery, please set to
your own model in a battery consumption current.
ŏ Select [SYSTEM] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
P.35
Linking method
Cases when linking is necessary:
・
When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・
When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest14CH
↔
FASSTest12CH etc.
)
・
When a new model was created by model
selection.
72
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
Telemetry function (FASSTest mode only)
To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry”
to “ACT”.
DL Interval (FASSTest mode only)
When a telemetry function is enabled, the
receiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor
data can be changed.
If a DL interval is increased, the response of
the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick
response will improve.
System Type selection procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [FASSTest-14CH]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Select the system type by scrolling the
touch sensor.
[FASSTest-14CH][FASSTest-12CH][FASST-
MULT][FASST-7CH][S-FHSS]
*An example of selections for each system is on the
following page.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH
mode) procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [SINGLE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the [SINGLE] or [DUAL] by scrolling
the touch sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Area mode selection (Frequency range)
procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [G] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2. Select the [G]or[F] by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*"F" is chosen only when using the transmitter is used in
France. Leave this in "G" otherwise.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Telemetry ACT/INH procedure
1. Move the cursor to the TELEMETRY [ACT] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2. Select the [ACT]or[INH] by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
DL Interval set procedure
1. Move the cursor to the TELEMETRY DL[1.0s]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Select the DL time by scrolling the touch
sensor. If a DL interval is increased, the
response of the sensor data display becomes
slower, but stick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range : 0.1s~2.0s
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
ID of a Primary
receiver displays.
ID of a Secondary
receiver displays.
In DUAL, a primary receiver is link previously.
Next, a secondary receiver is link.
73
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
System Type
■ FASSTest 14CH ---
■ FASSTest 12CH ---
■ FASST MULTI ---
■ FASST 7CH --- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.
■ S-FHSS --- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.
FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
14 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) can be used.
FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12
channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used, but
the response speed is a faster than that of the 14CH mode.
FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 14 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) can
be used.
• Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the FASSTest 12CH mode.
-Response speed has
priority over number
of channels
-Telemetry requires
only the current
receiver battery
-Want to use a
previously used
receiver as is
-Want to use a
miniature receiver
for indoor planes
-Want to use an
S-FHSS system
miniature receiver
FASSTest 14CH
FASSTest 12CH
FASST MULTI
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
R608FS
R6008HS
R6108SB
R6208SB
R6014HS
R6014FS
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE
R7008SB
R7003SB
R617FS
R6004FF
R616FFM
R6106HF
R6106HFC
R6203SB
R6203SBE
R6202SBW
R6303SB
R6303SBE
R2006GS
R2106GF
R2008SB
R7008SB
R7003SB
(
Usable receivers)
-Want to use more channels
-Want to use a large number
of telemetry functions
(The time of August, 2013)
The example for choosing System Type
Receiver link method in FASST and S-FHSS
If the receiver of FASST and S-FHSS is used, the
methods of a link differ.
1. Bring the transmitter and the receiver close to
each other, within 20 inches (half meter).
2. Turn on the transmitter .
3. Turn on the receiver .
4. Press and hold the Link switch more than
two(2) seconds. When the link is complete,
the LED in the receiver changes to solid
green. When the ID cannot be read due to
the surrounding environment, try reading it
with the transmitter and receiver antennas
touched.
*Follow the manual of the receiver to be used.
Moreover, carry out an operating check.
74
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
FUNCTION
Channel assignment of each function can be changed.
When you select model and wing (swash) types,
you will find that the optimized combinations of
servo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, you can freely
change combinations of servo output channels,
functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and control (sticks,
switches, and trim levers).
*You can also assign the same function to multiple servo
output channels such as assigning elevator function to CH2
and CH3.
Channel Replacement
When the channel is replaced in the Function
menu, replaced channel uses the setting data (ATV,
SUB-TRIM, REVERSE, F/S, and B-F/S, etc.).
Servo Output Channels
For FASSTest 14CH mode, you can set 12 linear
channels and two digital channels. For FASSTest
12CH mode, you can set 10 linear channels and
two digital channels. For FASST MULT mode, you
can set 12 linear channels and two digital channels.
Function change
1. Move the cursor to the function item of the
channel you want to change and touch the
RTN button.
*The function selection screen is displayed.
2. Move the cursor to the function name you
want to set and touch the RTN button.
*The function name blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button to execute the
change. (When you want to cancel this
operation, touch the S1 button.)
*Multiple channels can be assigned to one function.
For FASST 7CH mode, you can set only 7 linear
channels. For S-FHSS mode, you can set only 8
linear channels.
*DG1/2 (digital channels)
These channels can function as switched channels. You can
freely change combinations between servo output channels
and input controls (sticks, switches, and trim levers).
Motor Function
If you have either a Glider or Airplane Model
Type selected, and choose to activate the Motor
function, a reverse setting screen is displayed.
*If YES is selected, the output is reversed. If NO is selected,
the output is normal.
:DUQLQJ
As a safety precaution to prevent the motor
from starting unexpectedly, please switch
off the motor accordingly. We also suggest
removing the propeller from the motor as an
additional precaution.
Operation control change
1. Move the cursor to the "CTRL" item of the
channel you want to change and touch the
RTN button.
*The control selection screen is displayed.
2. Move the cursor to the control you want to
change, and touch the RTN button.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
ŏ Select [FUNCTION] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
ŏ Trim operation mode
"COMB": Combination mode
"SEPAR": Separate mode
It sets up by T1-T4 SET of LINKAGE MENU.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
75
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
&DPEHU0RWRU%XWWHUÀ\FRQWUROVHWWLQJJOLGHU
&DPEHUPRWRUEXWWHUÀ\IXQFWLRQFRQWUROFDQEHFKDQJHGIRU
each condition.
Camber, motor or butterfly control group/
single setting is performed at the function
setup screen.
"G": Group (common to all conditions)
"S": Single (set for each condition)
Trim setting
Move the cursor to the "TRIM" item of the
channel you want to change and touch the
RTN button.
*The trim setup screen is displayed.
The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen:
Trim selection
Move the cursor to the trim, lever, etc. you
want to set and touch the RTN button.
*The setting can be changed.
Trim rate setting
Move the cursor to the [RATE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Set the trim rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 30
Adjustment range : -150~150
(When the RTN button is touched for one second, the trim
rate is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Trim mode selection
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the trim mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A confirmation message appears.
Touch the RTN button to change the mode.
(To terminate input and return to the original
state, touch the S1 button.)
[NORM]: Normal mode. Normal trim (parallel
shift trim) operation.
[ATL]: ATL operation mode. Maximum
change near idle or low-stick position,
normally used with throttle trim. It is also
possible to reverse the travel.
*[NORMAL]/[REVERSE] selection is possible in "ATL"
mode.
Throttle trim (helicopter only)
* The throttle trim in conditions other than "normal" condition
can be inhibited.
When other than normal condition is
selected, move the cursor to throttle trim on
the function setup screen and touch the RTN
button for 1 second.
*When "X" is displayed, THR trim is inhibited in conditions
other than normal condition.
Channel replacement
Move the cursor to the channel # you want
to replace and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the destination channel # by scrolling
the touch sensor. A confirmation message
appears. Touch the RTN button to replace
the channel. (To terminate input and return
to the original state, touch the S1 button.)
76
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SUB-TRIM
Setting of neutral position of each servo.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fine
adjustments to the control surface after linkages
and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set to
their center position.
Sub-trim adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the channel you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -240~240 (steps)
(When the RTN button is touched for one second, sub-trim is
reset to the initial value.)
*Before sub-trim adjustment, it is very important to adjust the
linkages at the control surface so that you do not use sub-
trim, except for very minute adjustments.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
4. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
ŏ Select [SUB-TRIM] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value
77
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
REVERSE
Use to reverse the throw direction.
Servo Reverse changes the direction of an
individual servo’s response to a control input.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the
section on Swash AFR before reversing any servos.
With CCPM helicopters, always complete your
servo reversing prior to any other programming.
If you use pre-built Airplane/Sailplane functions
that control multiple servos, it may be confusing
Servo reversing procedure
*Upon setup completion of a new model, check whether or
not each servo is connected to the correct channel.
*Next, determine whether you need to reverse any channels
by moving each stick and/or other control inputs.
1. Move the cursor to the channel you want to
reverse and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
2. Select the direction by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
[NORM]: Normal
[REV]: Reverse
3. Touch the RTN button to change the
direction. (To terminate input and return to
the original state, touch the S1 button.)
*Repeat the operation above for each channel that must be
reversed.
to tell whether the servo needs to be reversed or a
setting in the function needs to be reversed. See the
instructions for each specialized function for further
details. Always check servo direction prior to every
ÀLJKWDVDQDGGLWLRQDOSUHFDXWLRQWRFRQ¿UPSURSHU
model memory, hook ups, and radio function.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
ŏ Select [REVERSE] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
78
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
FAIL SAFE
Sets the servos operating position when transmitter signals can no
longer be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
The Failsafe function may be used to set up
positions that the servos move to in the case of
radio interference.
You may set either of two positions for each
channel: Hold, where the servo maintains its last
commanded position, or failsafe, where each
servo moves to a predetermined position. You may
choose either mode for each channel. (FASST 7CH
mode: CH3 only)
The FX-22 system also provides you with an
advanced battery monitoring function that warns
you when the receiver battery has only a little
power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved
to the defined failsafe position. (FASST 7CH
mode: CH3 only) The battery failsafe may be
released by operating a predefined control on the
transmitter (default is throttle), do not continue
to fly, land as soon as possible. Remember, if the
Fail safe setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "F/S" item of the
channel you want to set and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the F/S mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
*The display blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button. (Touch the S1 button
to stop setting.)
*The channel switches to the F/S mode.
4. Move the cursor to the "POS" item.
Hold the corresponding stick, knob, slider,
etc. in the position you want the servo
to move to when the fail safe function is
activated and touch the RTN button for one
second.
*The set position is displayed in percentage.
*If you want to return that channel to the hold mode, move
the cursor to the "F/S" item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the F/S mode by
VFUROOLQJWKHWRXFKVHQVRU$FRQ¿UPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV
and then change the mode by touching the RTN button.
predefined control suddenly moves to a position
you did not command, land at once and check your
receiver battery.
'H¿QHVVHUYRSRVLWLRQZKHQVLJQDOVDUHORVWDQG
when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
:DUQLQJ
For safety, always set the fail safe functions.
Ɣ5HPHPEHUWRVHWWKHWKURWWOHFKDQQHOIDLOVDIHIXQFWLRQVRWKDW
the servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and
to the slow side from the hovering position for helicopters.
Crashing of the model at full high when normal radio waves
cannot be received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
Ɣ,IWKHEDWWHU\IDLOVDIHLVUHVHWE\WKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLWPD\
be mistaken for an engine malfunction and will be reset at
WKURWWOHVORZDQGWKHPRGHOZLOOFRQWLQXHWRÀ\,I\RXKDYH
any doubts, immediately land.
Battery fail safe setting procedure
Battery fail safe can be set for each channel
by the same method as the fail safe setting
procedure. Select and set the "B.F/S" item.
[ON]: Battery fail safe function ON
[OFF]: Battery fail safe function OFF
Battery fail safe release switch setting
This function temporarily releases the battery
fail safe function, so the fuselage can
recover after the battery fail safe function
was activated by a drop in the receiver
battery voltage. This setting selects the switch
which releases the battery fail safe function.
1. Move the cursor to the [RELEASE B.F/S] item in
the setup screen (last page).
2. Touch the RTN button.
*The switch selection screen is called.
*For a detailed description of the switch selection and ON/
OFF direction setting method, see [Switch Setting Method]
at the back of this manual.
ŏ Select [FAIL SAFE] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
79
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
END POINT
Sets the travel and limit point of each servo.
The End Point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, and
will correct improper linkage settings.
The travel rate can be varied from 0% to 140%
in each direction on channels 1 to 12(FASSTest
12CH mode). Also, the limit point where servo
throw stops may be varied from 0% to 155%.
Servo travel adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the travel icon of the
channel you want to adjust and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: 0~140
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
3. Repeat this procedure for each rate.
Limit point adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the limit point icon of the
channel you want to adjust and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Ajust the limit point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 135
Adjustment range: 0~155
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the limit
point is reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.
ŏ Select [END POINT] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(limit point)
(travel)
(limit point)
(travel)
80
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SERVO SPEED
Sets the speed of each servo.
The speed of the servo from 1CH to 12CH of
operation can be set up.
It can adjust to 0-27.
Speed becomes slow as a numerical value's 0
increases in the state of the fastest of the servo.
* Speed cannot be made quicker than the maximal rate of the
servo to be used.
Servo speed setting
1. Touch the Speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the adjustment buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
ŏInitial value: 0
ŏAdjustment range: 0~27 (steps)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
* It will overlap, if speed control of a S.BUS servo setup is
used at the time of S.BUS servo use, and speed changes.
Please use one either.
* The speed of THR is not set up simultaneously with THR
DELAY (model menu : only airplane).
ŏ Select [SERVO SPEED] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(channel)
(speed)
(speed)
(channel)
81
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
THR CUT
Stops the engine safely and easily.(airplane and helicopter only)
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
engine. Generally speaking, modelers will do so
E\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDWLGOH
The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead stick landings. The switch’s
location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults
to NULL.
Individually adjust the throttle cut activation
setting for each condition. (helicopter)
Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and access
the switch setup screen by touching the
RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Move the cursor to the [POS] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the servo operation position at throttle
cut operation by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 17
Adjustment range: 0~50
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
*With the selected cut switch ON and the throttle stick at idle;
adjust the rate until the engine consistently cuts off.
However, be sure that the throttle linkage is not pulled too
tight or unreasonable force is not applied to the servo.
Designating a throttle cut setting position.
(helicopter)
*A throttle cut function acts in the low side of the throttle
position.
*"THRO" setting is common with all condition.
:DUQLQJ
Normal setting is slightly above idle.
1. To add the throttle cut position, use the
cursor to select the THRO percentage
desired, then press and hold the RTN button
for one second.
*Since conditions are not offered when an airplane is selected,
the throttle cut options will vary from the options noted
below.
*The throttle cut POS and SW settings are utilized for all
conditions.
*If the throttle cut switch is activated, or on, this status will
continue even if the condition is changed to an inhibited
setting.
*If the condition is inhibited (INH) the throttle cut is off if the
SW is in the off position and the throttle stick is low.
ŏ Select [THR CUT] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏ Current throttle position
ŏ Individually adjust the Throttle Cut activation
setting for each condition. (helicopter)
ŏ Cut position
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ Throttle
cut status
ŏ Throttle
cut status
ŏ Throttle
stick position
82
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
,'/('2:1
Lowers the engine idling speed.(airplane only)
The Idle Down function lowers the engine to
its idle position. Like throttle cut, this is usually
DFFRPSOLVKHGE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOH
stick at idle. The action is not functional at high
throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The
switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as
it defaults to NULL.
Idle down setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and access
the switch setup screen by touching the RTN
button. Select the switch and ON direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
3. Offset rate setting:
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the servo offset rate at idle down
operation by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~0~100
* When a minus rate is input, an offset is applied at the high
side.
*Maximum offset amount is near maximum slow.
* When the RTN button is touched for one second, the offset
rate is reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
ŏ Select [IDLE DOWN] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ Current throttle position
83
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
6:$6+5,1*
Swash ring setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
2. Rate setting:
Move the cursor to the [RATE] item touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Set the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100.
Adjustment range: 50 to 200.
*Adjust the rate to maximum swash tilt.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Limits the swash plate travel to within a Àxed range. (Helicopter only)
This function limits the swash travel to a fixed
range in order to prevent damaging the swash
linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons
and elevators. It is very useful in 3D aerobatics
which use a large travel.
ŏ The operating range display area:
The vertical direction shows the
elevator travel. The horizontal
direction shows the aileron travel.
ŏ The marker shows the
stick position.
ŏ Select [SWASH RING] in the Linkage
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
ŏ When the swash ring function is activated,
a circle is displayed in the operating
range display area and the rate input box
is displayed. Stick operation is limited to
the area of this circle.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
84
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
6:$6+
Swash AFR and linkage correction function. (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1)
Neutral Point
At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates from
a perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may not
compensate effectively. To correct this use the
Neutral Point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
position. However, this adjustment changes only
the axis point of the compensation functions in this
menu, and does not affect the neutral position of
other functions.
Swash AFR
Swash AFR function reduces, increases, or
reverses the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and
collective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing
the motion of all servos involved in that function,
only when using that function.
Mixing Rate
This mixing is used to compensate the swash-
plate as necessary during specific control inputs.
Neutral point setting procedure
The neutral point becomes the correction
standard point.
*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point is near the
50% position makes the mixing amount small.
1. Neutral point setting
Move the cursor to the [POS] item and hold
the pitch operation so that the servo horn is
at a right angle to the linkage rod and Touch
the RTN button for one second. This value
indicates the servo's neutral position.
After reading the neutral point, use the
other correction functions to make further
adjustments.
The following compensation mixing is possible;
PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL,
and ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swash-
plate to for proper operation of each control using
the corresponding compensation mixing.
Linkage Compensation
This compensation mixing is used to correct the
swash-plate for pitch control at low pitch and high
pitch.
Speed Compensation
This function is used to cancel the reaction that
is generated by the difference in the movements of
each servo when the swash-plate moves.
Subtrim
Subtrim for aileron, elevator and pitch can be set
during swash setting.
Pitch adjustment function
+LJKQHXWUDODQGORZSLWFK¿[HGRXWSXWVFDQEH
used while adjusting the pitch.
Swash AFR setting procedure
The swash AFR function makes adjustments so
WKDWWKHVHUYRVWUDYHOWKHVSHFL¿HGDPRXQWE\>$,/@
[ELE], and [PIT] operation.
1. Move the cursor to the function you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Adjust the AFR rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 50
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the AFR
rate is reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
ŏ Select [SWASH] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
85
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
Mixing rate setting procedure
The HR3 swash-plate type will be used as an
example to describe mixing rate setting. The mixing
used in other swash modes may be different,
however, the setting procedure is the same.
*Set the throttle stick to the preset neutral point. Adjust the
length of the linkage rod so that the swash plate is horizontal
at this position.
*The sub-trim function can be used to make small
adjustments.
*Adjust so that the pitch curve is a straight line and the
helicopter achieves maximum pitch.
*Move the cursor to the item you want to adjust and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Touch
the RTN button to end adjustment and return to the cursor
mode.
1. Adjusting the aileron operation [AIL to PIT]
Adjust the AIL to PIT rate so there is no binding
in the elevator or pitch movement when the
aileron stick is moved to the left and right.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.
2. Adjusting the elevator operation [ELE to AIL]/
[ELE to PIT]
Adjust the ELE to AIL and ELE to PIT rates so
there is no binding in the aileron or pitch
movement when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The up and down sides can be adjusted individually.
3. Adjusting the pitch operation [PIT to AIL][PIT
to ELE]
Adjust the PIT to AIL and PIT to ELE rates so
that the swash plate moves to the level/
horizontal position when the throttle stick was
moved to maximum low and full high.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The slow and high sides can be adjusted individually.
Linkage compensation setting procedure
*Prior to utilizing the linkage compensation settings, it is
important to adjust the mixing rate settings.
*Linkage compensation overrides interference from the
aileron operation with the elevator or elevator operation
with the aileron at collective pitch control for low pitch and
high pitch.
*When making the following setting, move the cursor to the
item you want to set and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Touch the RTN button to end
adjustment and return to the cursor mode.
1. Compensating aileron input [AIL]
Set the throttle to the lowest position. Move
the aileron stick to the left and right and
adjust the aileron compensation amount
so that interference in the elevator or pitch
direction is minimal.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.
*If the interference increases when the compensation amount
was increased, make adjustments with the direction [DIR.]
using the plus "+" or minus "-".
2. Compensating elevator input [ELE]
Adjust the elevator compensation amount
so that the aileron or pitch direction
interference when the elevator stick was
moved up and down is minimal.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, perform aileron
and elevator compensation similarly at full
throttle.
Speed compensation setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "SPEED" item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. 4uickly move the elevator stick and
adjust the speed compensation amount
[SPEED] for minimum interference in the pitch
direction.
*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
86
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
Subtrim setting procedure
Subtrim can be set on the last page of the swash
setting screen.
*The sub-trim value set here is reflected at sub-trim of the
linkage menu.
Pitch adjustment procedure
The pitch adjustment function can be used on the
last page of the swash setting screen.
1. Call the last page of the swash setting
screen.
2. When the cursor is moved to a pitch
adjustment button and the RTN button is
touched, the corresponding pitch is output.
* In the pitch adjustment mode an * is displayed at the left
side of the current output setting button.
*If the cursor is moved to another button and the RTN button
is touched during pitch adjustment, the pitch adjustment
mode is deactivated.
Function details are as follows:
Button Function
High High pitch Àxed output mode
Neutral Neutral pitch Àxed output mode
Low Low pitch Àxed output mode
Moving Cyclic pitch output mode
*The cyclic pitch speed can be set with the button at the right
side of the “Moving” button.
Setting range: 1 to 100
*When the set value is large, motion becomes fast and when
the set value is small, motion becomes slow.
87
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
T1-T4 SET.
Digital trim settings
This function adjusts the digital trim's step
amount and operation mode (T1~T4.)
When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with the conditions when
combination mode is selected.
The FX-22 unit of trim is displayed on the home
screen.
Control step amount setting
1. Move the cursor to the [STEP] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2. Set the control step amount by scrolling the
touch sensor.
Initial value: 4
Adjustment range: 1~200
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the control
step amount is reset to the initial value.
*When the value is increased, the change per step becomes
larger.
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Separate/combination mode selection (Heli and
Glider only)
1. Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
*The display blinks.
[COMB.]: Combination mode. The trim's data
is reÁected in all Áight conditions.
[SEPAR]: Separate mode. Trim adjustments
are made individually for each flight
condition.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Display unit selection
1. Move the cursor to the [UNIT] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
*The display blinks.
[--]: A step number is displayed on the home
screen. There is no unit display.
[ ]: "" is displayed as a unit.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Trim Memory Operation procedure
1. Move the cursor to the [T1-T4 MEMORY] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. A conÀrmation message appears.
[INH]: Inhibited
[ACT]: Activated
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. At the home screen, move the cursor to the
trim you want to change and touch the RTN
for one second. The trim display is moved to
the center position.
*When the function is inhibited, the trim position returns to
the actual trim position.
Only the trim displayed on the home screen can
be moved to the center position without changing
the actual trim's memory position.
ŏ Select [T1-T4 SET.] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
ŏ Trim operation mode
"COMB.": Combination mode
"SEPAR": Separate mode
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
*The display blinks.
88
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
:$51,1*
Low battery alarm voltage set warning normal reset
The FX-22 includes an audible alarm that sounds
when the transmitter’s battery voltage drops below
a pre-determined setting; adjustable for cell types
and voltages.
Mixing warning at power ON can be reset to
OFF.
Accessing and Activating the Low Battery
Alarm
1. The low battery (LOW BATTERY) alarm
voltage is accessed through the FX-22·s
System Menu. Within the System Menu, use
the SensorTouch to highlight the sound
option and then press the return (RTN) button
to conÀrm the selection.
2. Use the SensorTouch to scroll to the low
battery (LOW BATTERY) alarm, and then press
the return (RTN) button to access the voltage
settings. Using the SensorTouch, adjust the
voltage as desired and/or determined by the
transmitter battery pack being utilized. The
voltage options range from 6.0V to 7.6V.
*When HT6F1800B is used :
It is not necessary to change from 7.2V of initial setting.
Setting to low voltage is dangerous.
:DUQLQJQRUPDOO\UHVHWWLQJPHWKRG
1. Move the cursor to the item you want to
reset to OFF and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the OFF mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
:DUQLQJGLVSOD\
Airplane: Throttle cut/Idle down/Throttle
position/Snap-roll/Motor position/Airbrake/
Motor
Helicopter: Condition/Throttle cut/Throttle
position/Throttle Hold
Glider: Condition/Motor position/Trim-mix/Motor
ŏ Select [WARNING] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
ŏ Push S1 button to advance to next page.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
*About low battery voltage, all the models included in one
transmitter are changed in common. It cannot set to different
voltage for every model. Moreover, data reset is not carried
out.
89
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEM.SET.
Displays voice software, and a setup of a voice interval
This screen is related with the speech of
telemetry.
The kind of voice software installed in FX22 of
you is displayed.
Moreover, the interval which reproduces a sound
is set up.
*The language chosen for the Speech data will affect only the
Speech function. It will not change the language used in the
transmitter's text display.
*The Speech function can only be used with headphones
plugged into the earphone plug.
*You will need to purchase headphones or earphones with a
3.5plug.
ŏ Select [TELEM.SET.] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
How to hear telemetry data with a speech.
1. The alarm setting screen of each sensor is
opened to page 2nds.
2. Move the cursor to "INH" beside "SPEECH".
3. It scrolls and makes it "ACT".
4. Touch the RTN button.
5. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [--] item and access
the switch setup screen by touching the RTN
button. Select the switch and ON direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
*In "--", it always gives a speech.
6. The volume of an earphone is adjusted
by [SYSTEM MENU]
→
[SOUND]
→
[PHONE
VOLUME].
*The format of the speech output is
[sensor type］[data］［unit]［data］［data］［data］［data］
Ex. Rx battery
「battery」「seven point four」「volt」「seven point four」
「seven point four」「seven point four」「seven point
four」
*If the telemetry data is changed frequently, the speech data will
not be the same as the displayed data.
How to hear telemetry
data with a speech.
How to hear telemetry alert with a speech.
When the ALERT button is ACT from alarm
setting screen, the speech function works when
the alert occurs.
*The format of the speech output is
"warning"
[sensor type］[data］［unit］
Ex. Rx battery
「warning」「battery」「four point zero」「volt」
*If the telemetry data is changed frequently, the speech data will
not be the same as the displayed data.
How to change speech interval
1. Move the cursor to "INTERVAL" time.
2. Select the time by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button.
Earphone
Plug
ŏ The speech language installed is
indicated.
 
When the speech data is not
installed, "----------" is displayed
.
In order to change a speech language,
it is necessary to install speech data from
the WEB site of Futaba.
Refer to the WEB site for details.
ŏ The version No. of the speech data
Àle is indicated.
 
When the speech
data is not installed, nothing is
displayed.
ŏ The interval of speech can be set.
The setting range is from 0 [Sec] to 30 [Sec].
ACT/INH button
ON/OFF switch
[LINKAGE MENU]
[TELEMETRY]
[Sensor to set up]
[2/2 page]
90
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY
Displaying data from the receiver
This screen displays your choice of data from the
receiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding
other data from your aircraft. For example, if the
receiver voltage drops, the user can be warned by
an alarm (and vibration).
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
*A telemetry function cannot be used for the 2nd receiver of
dual receiver mode. The voltage and Ext voltage of a 2nd
receiver cannot be known with a transmitter.
ŏ Select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
ŏ Push S1 button to advance to next page.
ŏ [TELEMETRY] can be called if the HOME/EXIT button
is pushed from a home screen.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Receiver -! Transmitter. The
reception strength is shown.
Telemetry date
1. Telemetry screen can be called if the HOME/
EXIT button is pushed from the home screen.
Or select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen by touching
the RTN button.
2. If each item is chosen and the RTN button is
pushed, an alarm setup can be performed
with the minimum/maximum after a
transmitter is turned on.
*Receiver voltage can be checked immediately. An optional
sensor will need to be attached to S.BUS2 of a receiver if
you would like to see other information.
*No special setup is necessary if each sensor displayed
is left as in the default setup. Separate sensor ID
is also unnecessary. However, if two or more of
one kind of sensor is used, setup is required in the
"SENSOR" menu.
:DUQLQJ
Do not watch the transmitter screen during
ÀLJKW
<RXPD\ORRVHVLJKWRIWKHDLUFUDIWGXULQJÀLJKWDQGWKLVLV
extremely dangerous. Have an assistant on hand to check
the screen for you. A pilot should NEVER take his eyes off
his aircraft.
91
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
How to see Telemetry data
The telemetry screen is modiÀed.
3. You will use the "Display" function to choose
how many sensors are shown on your
Telemetry monitor.
TELEMETRY MONITOR set up
1. The HOME/EXIT button is pushed from HOME
screen and TELEMETRY MONITOR is called.
4. If you want to show two sensors on your
Telemetry screen, select 2 in "Display". Then
move down to the Sensor to select which
other item is shown.
It pushes from
HOME screen.
To TELEMETRY MONITOR
You can display any items on the telemetry screen
up to 4 items at FASSTest 14CH mode. The benefit
of expansion of a character will be obtained by
choosing the display items 1 and 2.
Ex. 1 item is displayed Ex. 2 items are displayed
Ex. 4 items are displayedEx. 3 items are displayed
If the numeric part
(included "+","-",",")
is over the 6 letters, it
becomes the smaller size
automatically. It is same
size as 2 items screen.
In FASSTest12CH mode,
they are only 1 and 2 item
displays.
If a cursor is moved to items (Rx-BATT,
EXT-VOL, TEMP. etc.) and RTN is touched,
the alarm setting screen of the item will be
displayed.
1
1
2
13
24
[ Display position ]
5. If you want to show three sensors on your
Telemetry screen, select 3 in "Display". Then
move down to the Sensor to select which
other item is shown.
6. To SENSOR " ----------" selection will reduce a
display item.
When using a sensor that has two or more
functions, you will want to scroll to select
which will be displayed. (ALTITUDE,VARIO,
etc.)
1
2
13
2
2. Move the cursor to the "RECEIVER" or
"SENSOR" (SBS-XXX etc.) and touch the RTN
button.
92
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : Rx-BATT.
Displaying data from the receiver battery voltage
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver is
displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [Rx-BATT.] in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Receiver battery voltage
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ Ņ The "down" arrow will
indicate that an alarm will
sound when the voltage
drops to below the setting.
Alert set
1. Move the cursor to the ŅALERT [INH] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~8.4V
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
93
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : EXT-VOLT
Displaying data from the EXT battery voltage port
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data from
the EXT-battery output from the R7008SB receiver.
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
connect external voltage connector of the R7008SB
receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 (FUTM5551) or
SBS-01V to the battery you desire to measure the
voltage of.
You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if
the voltage set by you is exceeded.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage will be received in
the FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode will display all telemetry data.
ŏ Select [EXT-VOLT] in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ EXT battery voltage
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ ŅThe arrow will indicate that
an alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to below
the setting.
ŏAn alarm is activated,
even when the input
voltage is 0V (when
set to 0V).
Alert set
1. Move the cursor to the ŅALERT [INH] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
*CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
94
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : TEMP.
Displaying data from the temperature
TEMP is a screen which displays/sets up
the temperature information from an optional
temperature sensor.
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
EDWWHU\HWFZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHGLVSOD\HG
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [TEMP.] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Temperature
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ Ņ A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when the
temperature drops
below the set value.
ŏ Ń An upward arrow will
show that an alarm
will sound when the
temperature rises above
the set value.
Alert set : Hot warning
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŃTHRESHOLD [100
℃
]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
℃
Adjustment range: -19
℃
~200
℃
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Alert set : Low-temperature warning
1. 2/2 page is accessed by pushing S1. Move
the cursor to the ŅALERT item and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0
℃
]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
℃
Adjustment range: -20
℃
~199
℃
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
95
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : RPM
Displaying data from the RPM
RPM is a screen which displays / sets up the
RPM information from an optional RPM sensor.
The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHVKRZQ
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [RPM] in the TELEMETRY screen
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ RPM
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ"MAGNETIC" or "OPTICAL"
is set according to the
sensor you use.
SBS-01RM : MAGNETIC
SBS-01RO : OPTICAL
ŏ ŅA downward arrow
indicates that the
alarm will sound
when the RPM falls
below the set value.
ŏ ŃAn upward arrow
indicates that the
alarm will sound
when the RPM rises
above the set value.
Alert set : Over rotations
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the Ń THRESHOLD
[2000rpm]item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 2000rpm
Adjustment range: 1rpm~150,000rpm
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Alert set : Under rotations
1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ŅALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0rpm]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpm~149,999rpm
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
ŏ In "MAGNETIC", the gear ratio
of your engine (motor) you are
using is entered.
ŏ In "OPTICAL", the number of
blades of the propeller ( r o t
o r ) your model is entered.
*A RPM sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
96
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : ALTITUDE
Displaying data from the altitude
ALTITUDE is a screen which displays / sets up the
altitude information from an optional altitude sensor or
*36VHQVRU7KHDOWLWXGHRIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQ
be known. If it becomes higher (low) than preset altitude,
you can be told by alarm. To show warning by vibration
can also be chosen. Data when a power supply is turned
on shall be 0 m, and it displays the altitude which
FKDQJHGIURPWKHUH(YHQLIWKHDOWLWXGHRIDQDLU¿HOGLV
high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference from an
airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates the altitude
from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure will
get lower as you go up in altitude, using this the sensor
will estimate the altitude. Please understand that an exact
advanced display cannot be performed if atmospheric
pressure changes in a weather situation.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [ALTITUDE] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Altitude
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ Ņ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches
below your set value.
ŏ Ń An upward arrow
indicates the alarm will
sound when the altitude
reaches above your set
value.
First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which the
altitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Move the cursor to the [SET] of "REFERENCE"
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, touch the S1 button.)
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather also
DWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKW
Alert set : High side
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŃTHRESHOLD [200m]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 200m
Adjustment range: -499m~5,000m
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Alert set : Low side
1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1. Move
the cursor to the ŅALERT item and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [-50m]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: -50m
Adjustment range: -500m~4,999m
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, touch the S1 button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
*Altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
97
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : VARIO
Displaying data from the variometer
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up the
variometer information from an optional altitude
sensor or GPS sensor.
7KHYDULRPHWHURIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQ
be known.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model's
status, the FX-22 incorporates a different melody
for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to
indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or
descending at a rapid rate.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [VARIO] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Variometer
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ If this is set to ACT, a melody will be activated during the rise
or dive, depending on your set values. The melody function
can be turned on and off with the speciÀed switch.
ŏ Melody function switch display.
When the cursor is moved to
this option and the RTN button
is pushed, the display changes
to the switch selection screen.
When the melody function is
active, ´onµ is displayed. When
the melody function is set to INH
or the switch is OFF, nothing is
displayed.
ŏ Ņ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches
below your set value.
ŏ Ń An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches
above your set value.
Alert set : Rise side
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŃTHRESHOLD [0m/s]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0m/s
Adjustment range: -49m/s~50m/s
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Alert set : Dive side
1. Scroll to the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ŅALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0m/s]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0m/s
Adjustment range: -50m/s~49m
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, touch the S1 button.)
*Altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
● The vario melody outputs
from the phone jack.
The priority of the phone output is below;
Speaking Alarm >> Speaking data >> Vario Melody
(High priority) (Low priority)
98
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : BATTERY
Displaying data from the battery voltage
In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed.
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
connect external voltage connector of R7008SB
⇔
SBS-01V
⇔
Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The drive
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXT-
VOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P
lines is displayed here.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [BATTERY] in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ battery voltage
ŏ The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ ŅThe arrow will indicate that
an alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to below
the setting.
Alert set
1. Move the cursor to the ŅALERT [INH] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~8.4V
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
99
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : DISTANCE
Displaying data from the Distance Screen
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude
data from an SBS-01G GPS Sensor (sold
separately), and allows the distance to the airborne
aircraft to be read by the transmitter. When the
aircraft flies inside or outside the set distance an
alarm and vibration alerts the pilot.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mount
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
 
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [DISTANCE] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏCurrent distance
ŏDistance alarm setting range
1m
∼
5,000m
*Alarm when the aircraft moves far
away.
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
ŏDistance alarm setting range 0m
∼
4,999m
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
ŏ This indicates Maximum
Distance the aircraft Áew to.
ŏ The Ņ arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the distance drops
below the set value.
ŏ The Ńarrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the set value is
exceeded.
Setting the reference position
1. Turn on the transmitter and the model with
the GPS sensor installed in it.
2. Wait for the GPS accuracy indicator to
display three bars.
3. Move the cursor to REFERENCE [SET] and
touch the RTN button. The models current
position is now stored and the distance is set
to 0 yd.
4. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, touch the S1 button.)
*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.
Setting a "too far" alert distance
1. Move the cursor to the ŃALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [1,000m]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the distance by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
*
ŏThis indicates the receiving accuracy from a GPS satellite. When
three bars are displayed, the GPS is ready for use. Pushing
[REFERENCE] sets the current aircraft position as the starting point.
*Positioning time of GPS
A short time is required until the positioning of
the GPS is established. In the meantime, don't
PRYHWKHPRGHOGXULQJWKLVSURFHVV:DLWXQWLO
the GPS sensor's LED turns solid green. If it is
blinking green it is still acquiring the satellites
signals.
100
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
Surface
Altitude
Slant
ŏAltitude calculated as
either straight
 
line
distance (slant) or surface
distance on a map can
also be selected
 
(3/3)
ŏCurrent position display.
N: North latitude
E: East longitude
Setting a "too close" alert distance.
1. Access the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ŅALERT item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. Move the cursor to the ŅTHRESHOLD [0yd]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button.
ŏ Selecting Surface or Slant distances [DISTANCE] in the TELEMETRY screen by
touching the RTN button once and the S1 button twice.
Two distance calculation methods are available
Surface (straight line distance), and Slant may be
selected.
1. Select page 3 by touching the S1 button twice
from the ´DISTANCEµ screen.
2. Select SLANT! SURFACE! next to ´MODEµ,
scroll either to the desired method and touch
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
*
101
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TELEMETRY : SPEED
Displaying data from the speed
The speed screen displays and sets the speed data
from an SBS-01G (GPS sensor) sold separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be
displayed.
After flight, the maximum speed during flight
can be viewed. Because this speed is based on
position data from a GPS satellite, the ground speed
is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently,
with a head wind, the displayed speed decreases
and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [SPEED] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏDisplays the current speed
ŏ Displays the maximum speed after
the transmitter is turned on.
ŏSpeed alarm setting range
1
∼
500km/h
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the speed has increased.
ŏSpeed alarm setting range 0
∼
499km/h
(ŃTHRESHOLD ! ŅTHRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the speed has decreased.
ŏ The Ņ arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the speed drops
below the set value.
ŏ The Ń arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the speed exceeds
the set value.
Alert setting when speed increases
1. Set ´ŃALERTµ on the SPEED! screen to ACT.
Move the cursor to INH and touch the RTN
button.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4. The speed at which an alarm is generated can
be set by selecting the speed display next to ´Ń
THRESHOLDµ and touching the RTN button. This
generates an alarm when the speed increases.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
Alert setting when speed decreases
1. Select page 2 by pressing S1 from the SPEED!
screen and set ´ Ņ ALERTµ to ACT.
2. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
3. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
4.The speed at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to ´ Ņ THRESHOLDµ and touching the RTN
button. This sounds an alarm when the speed
decreases.
5. Ajust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
6. Touch the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, touch the S1
button.)
*Speed alarm precaution
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it cannot
be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft that stalls
at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater even
through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In addition,
ZLWKDQDLUFUDIWWKDWZLOOGLVLQWHJUDWHLQPLGÀLJKWDWNPKDW
an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches 30km/h the
airplane will disintegrate in midair due to over speeding even at
a ground speed of 370km/h.
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
102
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
TELEMETRY : CURRENT, VOLTAGE,CAPACITY
Displaying data from the battery
Compatible with the Robbe current sensor (F1678).
The current, voltage and battery capacity can be
displayed. Please read the current sensor instruction
manual for more information.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
ŏ Select [CURRENT-CURR-1678] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.
ŏ Select [CAPACITY-CURR-1678] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.
ŏ Select [VOLTAGE-CURR-1678] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.
678] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
1678] i th TELEMETRY d
*Robbe Current sensor CURR-F1678
must be installed in the aircraft.
*Refer to the another page for each setup.
ŏPress the S1 button to advance to the next page.
（Example of registration at slot No. 16）
ŏ Select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
ŏ [TELEMETRY] can be called if the HOME/EXIT button is pushed from a home screen.
103
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SENSOR
Various telemetry sensors setting
This screen registers the telemetry sensors used
with the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it
to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of
sensor, they must be registered here.
ŏ Select [SENSOR] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
ŏ Sensor ID: When multiple sensors of the
same type are not used, ID is unnecessary.
ŏ As shown in the table below, an altimeter requires 3 contiguous slots
and a GPS sensor requires 8 contiguous slots. In addition, since the GPS
(SBS-01G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24, slots 6 and 7 are inhibited.
＜
Assignable slot
＞
*Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.
>:KDWLVDVORW"@
Servos are classified by CH, but sensors are
classified in units called “slot”. There are slots
from No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
Using a sensor which uses two or more slots,
the required number of slots is automatically
assigned by setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are
used, the sensors themselves must allocate unused
slots and memorize that slot.
*3 slots of altitude sensor are used.
*8 slots of GPS sensor are used.
Sensor
The required
number of slots
The number which can be used as a start slot Selling area
TEMP (SBS-01T) 1 slot 1 ∼ 31
Global
RPM (SBS01RM,SBS-
01RO)
1 slot 1 ∼ 31
Voltage (SBS-01V) 2 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,20,21,
22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
Altitude (SBS-01A) 3 slots
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,24,2
5,26,27,28,29
GPS (SBS-01G) 8 slots 8,16,24
TEMP125-F1713 1 slot 1 ∼ 31
Europe
VARIO-F1712 2 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,20,21,
22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
VARIO-F1672 2 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,20,21,
22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
GPS-F1675 8 slots 8,16,24
CURR-F1678 3 slots
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,24,2
5,26,27,28,29
n in the table below an altimeter requires 3
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ To next page
104
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
ŏ Call page 7 by touching the S1 button 6 times from
the [SENSOR] menu.
SENSOR : RELOAD
SENSOR : REGISTER
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
When using multiple sensors of the same type
the sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the FX-22 as
VKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDWWKHULJKWDQGUHJLVWHUWKHPE\
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor is
registered in the transmitter.
This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at the
right and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.
All the sensors to be used are connected.
SENSOR
SENSOR
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
);
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
);
SENSOR
Reading all the sensors to be used
1. Connect all the sensors and receiver
batteries to be used to the FX-22 through a
hub as shown in the Àgure above.
2. Move the cursor to ´RELORDµ on page 7 of
the [SENSOR] screen.
3. Touch the RTN button.
All the sensors are registered and can be
used.
Additional sensor registration
1. Connect the sensor and receiver battery to
be used to the FX-22 through a hub as shown
in the Àgure at the right.
2. Move the cursor to ´REGISTERµ on page 7 of
the Sensor! screen.
3. Touch the RTN button.
The sensor is registered and can be used.
*
When the number of slots needed in registration is
LQVXI¿FLHQWDQHUURULVGLVSOD\HGDQGUHJLVWUDWLRQFDQQRWEH
performed. Disable unused slots or perform the following
relocate.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ To next page
105
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
This function secures contiguous unused slots
by rearranging the registration state when sensor
registration and deregistration are performed
repeatedly and the unused slots are fragmented.
Relocate of sensors to be used
1. Connect all the sensors and receiver
batteries to be used to the FX-22 through a
hub as shown in the Àgure above.
2. Move the cursor to ´RELOCATEµ on page 7 of
the [SENSOR] screen.
3. Touch the RTN button.
This procedure changes the slot No. of one
registered sensor.
Sensor slot change
1. Connect the sensor and receiver battery to
be changed to the FX-22 through a hub as
shown in the Àgure above.
2. Move the cursor to ´SET SLOTµ on page 7 of
the Sensor! screen.
3. Touch the RTN button. A sensor details screen
appears.
4. Move the cursor to ´LOADµ and touch the
RTN button.
5. The current start slot is displayed. Move the
cursor to the number of the start slot and
change it to the desired value.
（
Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like the
table of all pages.
）
6. Move the cursor to ´WRITEµ and touch the
RTN button.
All the sensors to be used are connected.
SENSOR
SENSOR
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
);
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR : RELOCATE
SENSOR : SET SLOT
);
SENSOR
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
ŏ Call page 7 by touching the S1 button 6 times from
the [SENSOR] menu.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ To next page
106
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
DATA RESET
Model memory setting data reset.
This function is designed to allow you to reset
trim settings or all of the settings saved in the active
model memory. You may individually choose to
reset the following data;
T1~T4:
Reset the digital trim setting.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Data resetting method
1. Move the cursor to the item you want to
reset and touch the RTN button.
$FRQ¿UPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV
2. Execute reset by touching the RTN button for
one second. (Touch the S1 button to cease
resetting.)
[T1-T4]: Resets only the T1-T4
[ALL MODEL SETTING]: Resets all Linkage and
Model Menu functions except for system
and low battery voltage, Model Select and
Model Type.
[TELEMETRY]: Resets only the teremetry
functions.
All model setting:
Resets all Linkage and Model Menu functions
except for system and low battery voltage, Model
Select and Model Type.
*
If the Model Type selected is Glider, the motor function
channel is automatically reversed in the Reverse menu; all
other channels remain normal.
TELEMETRY:
Reset the telemetry setting.
ŏ Select [DATA RESET] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
107
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
MODEL MENU (COMMON FUNCTIONS)
This section describes the D/R, program mixing,
and other functions common to all model types.
Before setting the model data, use the Model
Type function of the Linkage menu to select the
model type matched to the aircraft. If a different
model type is selected afterwards, the D/R, program
mixing, and other parameters are reset.
If either a helicopter or glider have been selected
DVWKHPRGHOW\SHWKHQWKHVSHFL¿FIXQFWLRQVLQWKH
0RGHOPHQXFDQEHVHWIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ,I
you want to switch the settings for each condition
by switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition
6HOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV8SWR¿YH
conditions can be used)
Note: The FX-22 is designed so that the airplane
and glider (including EP glider) model types
are compatible with aircraft of similar type
wings.
This section outlines the relationship between
the functions common to airplanes and
gliders, except some dedicated functions,
and model type.
The setting menus will depend on the number
of servos and other differences according to
the wing type used. The setup screens in the
instruction manual are typical examples.
*The Model menu screen depends on the
model type.
Model Menu functions (Common) list
Ɣ6(592
6HUYRWHVWDQGVHUYRSRVLWLRQGLVSOD\)RUD
description of its functions, see the Linkage Menu
section.)
Ɣ&21',7,21DSSOLFDEOHWRKHOLFRSWHUDQG
JOLGHUVHOHFWLRQV
)OLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDGGLWLRQGHOHWLRQFRS\
condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.
Ɣ'8$/5$7(
7KH'5FXUYHRID);WUDQVPLWWHUPD\EH
DFWLYDWHGIURPDVZLWFKVWLFNSRVLWLRQHWF)RU
information on how to do so, please refer to the
Switch Setting Method located at the back of this
manual.
Ɣ352*0,;
7KH);WUDQVPLWWHUDOORZVXSWRILYH
completely customizable program mixes.
ŏ Access the model menu shown below by
touching the MDL button twice at the home
screen, etc.
*
ŏ Select the function
name and return to
the Model menu by
touching the RTN button
or pushing the HOME/
EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
ŏ Select the function you want to set and
access the setup screen by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ To next page
RETURN
108
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
CONDITION
Flight condition's switch assignment, copy, priority change and
condition delay can be set. [except airplane type]
This function, in the Model menu, can be used
WRVZLWFKWKHVHWWLQJVRIXSWRÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
Please note this is not applicable to airplane type
selections.
Note: To prevent accidental activation of any
XQXVHGÁLJKWFRQGLWLRQVGXULQJ ÁLJKWVHWWKH
switch setting of those unused conditions to
null [--].
ŏ A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion which may be
generated when there are sudden changes
in the servo positions and when there are
variations in the operating time between
channels during condition switching. The
delay can be set for each channel to ensure
maximum performance from your aircraft.
When setting the delay function for a speciÀc
Áight condition, the related function changes
after a delay corresponding to the set
amount.
ŏ If multiple conditions were set, their
operational priority may be customized as
desired.
&XUUHQWO\VHOHFWHGFRQGLWLRQQDPH
ŏ Select [CONDITION] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the touch sensor. Then, touch the
RTN button.
*The current condition can not be selected for the copy
destination condition.
3. Move the cursor to the [COPY] item and
touch the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears.
*The display blinks.
4. Touch the RTN button for one second and
the copying is completed. (Touch the S1
button to stop copying.)
&RQGLWLRQQDPH
1. Move the cursor to the condition which you
want to change.
2. The RTN button is pushed and it goes to a
name input screen.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>8VHU
name registration Method] at this manual.
*A name of up to 8 characters can be entered as the condition
name. Please note that a space is also counted as one
character.
&RQGLWLRQVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQGHOHWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the switch item of the
condition you want to select/delete and
access the switch setup screen by touching
the RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
&RQGLWLRQFRS\
6HWXSVFUHHQSDJH
1. Move the cursor to the [SOURCE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the copy source condition by scrolling
the touch sensor. Then, touch the RTN button.
2. Move the cursor to the [DESTIN.] item and
touch the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
&RQGLWLRQQDPH &RQGLWLRQVZLWFK
109
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
3ULRULW\FKDQJH
1. Move the cursor to the priority up-arrow or
down-arrow you want to change and touch
the RTN button.
The priority of the corresponding condition is
changed. (The last condition becomes the
highest priority.)
*The Normal condition cannot be changed or moved, its
priority is always the lowest.
&RQGLWLRQGHOD\VHWWLQJ
6HWXSVFUHHQSDJH
1. Select the condition which you want to set.
2. Move the cursor to the "DELAY" icon of the
channel you want to set and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the delay amount by scrolling the
touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
3. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
110
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
'8$/5$7(
The angle and curve of each stick function can be set. [All model types]
Dual rate function is used to adjust the amount
of throw and the operational curve of the stick
IXQFWLRQVDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGUXGGHUIRUHDFK
ÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQRUXSWRUDWHVIRUHDFKIXQFWLRQ
)RUDLUSODQHW\SHLWLVDOVRSRVVLEOHWRDGMXVWWKH
operational curve of the throttle function.
This is normally used after the End Point
programming has been completed to define the
maximum throw. When mixing is applied from one
channel to another channel, both channels can be
adjusted at the same time by adjusting the operation
rate through the dual rate function.
Neutral position of the dual rate curve can be
set.
'XDOUDWHFXUYHRI)/$3)/$3%877(5)/<
DQG&$0%(5IXQFWLRQFDQEHVHW$LUSODQH
Glider)
)/$3DQG%877(5)/<DUHJOLGHURQO\IXQFWLRQV
(;3UDWHVHWWLQJLVQRWDOORZHGLQWKH)/$3
)/$3%877(5)/<DQG&$0%(5IXQFWLRQV
,QGLYLGXDOVZLWFKVHWWLQJLVQRWDOORZHGLQWKH)/$3)/$3
DQG%877(5)/<&$0%(5IXQFWLRQV&RQGLWLRQ
switching only)
ŏ Select [DUAL RATE] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
&XUUHQWO\VHOHFWHGFLUFXLW
ŏNeutral position
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏLeft/right (up/down) rate
ŏOperation curve (left/right, up/down)
ŏSwitch selection
[Airplane]
[Helicopter/glider]
ŏCondition Mode
selection
ŏSwitch mode
selection
ŏCondition selection
ŏSwitch selection
8SWR¿YHUDWHVIRUHDFKIXQFWLRQ
ŏFunction selection
111
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
'XDOUDWHVHWWLQJSURFHGXUH
1. Function selection
Move the cursor to the function selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Select the function you want to adjust by
scrolling the touch sensor.
Touch the RTN button to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection
Move the cursor to the circuit # item and
access the switch setup screen by touching
the RTN button. Select the switch activation
method and the activation position (if
applicable).
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
3. Left/right (up/down) rate adjustment
3HUIRUPWKHVHWWLQJVEHORZDIWHUFKDQJLQJWRWKHFLUFXLWRU
condition you want to adjust.
Move the cursor to the rate item you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: 0~140
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for additional rate
and other functions as desired.
4. Operation curve (EXP curve) adjustment
3HUIRUPWKHVHWWLQJVEHORZDIWHUFKDQJLQJWRWKHFLUFXLWRU
condition you want to adjust.
Move the cursor to the EXP item you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
8VLQJWKH(;3FXUYHLVHIIHFWLYHWRVPRRWKHRUVRIWHQWKH
FRQWUROLQSXWVDURXQGFHQWHUWRDYRLGRYHUFRQWUROOLQJWKH
model. This is often used for the ailerons, elevator and
rudder and may be used with the throttle in the case of an
airplane selection to smoothe the engine controls as well.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for all other rates and
functions as desired.
5. Neutral position adjustment
3HUIRUPWKHVHWWLQJVEHORZDIWHUFKDQJLQJWRWKHFLUFXLWRU
condition you want to adjust.
Move the cursor to the [NT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the neutral
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to the cursor mode.
112
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
352*0,;
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to five mixings
can be used for each model. [All model types]
Programmable mixing may be used to correct
undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also be
XVHGIRUXQXVXDOFRQWUROFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV0L[LQJPHDQV
that the motion of a command channel, called the
"master," is added to the motion of the mixed channel,
called "slave."
<RXPD\FKRRVHWRKDYHWKH0DVWHUVWULPDGGHGWR
WKH6ODYHFKDQQHOUHVSRQVH7ULPVHWWLQJ7KHPL[LQJ
FXUYH/LQHDUSRLQWFDQEHFKDQJHG<RXPD\VHOHFW
0L[LQJ212))VZLWFKFRQWURORU\RXPD\FKRRVHWR
have mixing remaining on all the time.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link
function, which allows Programmable mixing to be
linked with the special mixing functions, or with other
programmable mixing functions. The link function can
be set up for Master and Slave channel individually.
ŏ Select [PROG. MIX] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏLink setting
ŏTrim mode setting
ŏON/OFF
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
0L[VHWXSVFUHHQFDOO
ŏ Move the cursor to the mix # whose function you want to activate
and access the setup screen by touching the RTN button.
ii
[Linear curve] [5-point curve]
ŏCurrent mix No.
ŏMaster CH
ŏSlave CH
ŏSwitch selection
ŏCurve selection ŏCurve selectionŏOffset rate(X, Y)
ŏMixing rate (Left/right, up/down)
ŏPoint rate (point1-5)
ŏMix #
3URJPL[VHWWLQJSURFHGXUH
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
7KHIXQFWLRQLVDFWLYDWHG21RU2))GLVSOD\
212))VZLWFKDQGPL[UDWHDUHQRW VHWHYHQWKRXJKWKH
function is activated.
113
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
Ɣ212))VZLWFKVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the switch item and
access the switch setup screen by touching
the RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
$OZD\VRQZKHQ>@
Ɣ0DVWHUFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the [MASTER] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the function by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to change the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. When you want to link this mixing with other
mixes, move the cursor to the [LINK] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the link mode, either [] or [-], by
scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to set the link mode
and return to the cursor mode.
*Check to ensure that the link mode is functioning properly
by operating the mix accordingly.
*Master channel control can be set to activate based on the
amount of stick input, or VR input, neither of which include
ATV, D/R, and mixing selection. In this case, the switch
setup screen is displayed by touching the RTN button with
"H/W" selected in the function selection. Select master
FKDQQHOFRQWURO7RWHUPLQDWHWKH+: VHOHFWLRQVHOHFW
WKH>@GLVSOD\DQGWRXFKWKH571EXWWRQ
Ɣ6ODYHFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the [SLAVE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the function by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to change the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. When you want to link this mixing with other
mixes, move the cursor to the [LINK] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the link mode to [] or [-] by scrolling
the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to set the link mode
and return to the cursor mode.
*Check the direction by actual operation.
Ɣ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ
1. When changing the trim mode, move the
cursor to the [TRIM] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select ON/OFF by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to change the trim
mode ON/OFF and return to the cursor
mode.
7RLQFRUSRUDWHWKHPL[LQJIURPWKHPDVWHUWULPVHOHFW>21@
,IWULPLVQRWGHVLUHGVHOHFW>2))@
*Effective when a function is set in the master channel.
Ɣ/LQHDUFXUYHVHWWLQJ
[Rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the mixing rate setting
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for all other rates as
desired.
[Offsetting the curve horizontally in the vertical
or horizontal direction]
1. Move the cursor to the [OFFS] setting item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
Adjust the offset rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for the other direction.
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
[Rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the point rate setting item
you want to adjust and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
114
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
)8(/0,;
Dedicated mixing used to adjust the fuel mixture of applicable
engines. [Airplane/helicopter]
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXWLOL]HGWRUH¿QHLQÀLJKWQHHGOH
adjustments of engines that offer mixture control
carburetors.
Note: Initial settings does not assign fuel mix to
any channel. Prior to utilizing the Fuel Mix
settings, select an unused channel on your
receiver and assign it accordingly for the
mixture control. Additionally, please make
sure that your [Control] and [Trim] are set to
null [--].
ŏ Select [FUEL MIX] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏAcceleration setting
A
cc
el
er
at
io
n
se
tt
in
g
ŏNeedle high trim
selection
[Airplane type]
[Helicopter type]
ŏEngine cut setting
ŏMixing curve copy function
Move the COPY item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the touch sensor and touch the
RTN button. Select the [YES] and touch
the RTN button.
115
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
*Needle high trim works as high trim based on the center.
:RUNVOLNH$7/WULP
Ɣ$FFHOHUDWLRQVHWWLQJ$LUSODQH
*This function is used to adjust the needle/engine rise
characteristics during acceleration. This enables an
acceleration function which temporarily increases the needle
operation from the throttle stick.
This function is used when there are symptoms of the
mixture being too lean or too rich, which would be
generated by sudden throttle stick inputs.
[Acceleration rate setting (RATE)]
*Acceleration can be adjusted for both high and low settings.
[Damping rate setting (DUMPING)]
7KHUHWXUQWLPHDIWHURSHUDWLRQ'XPSLQJFDQEHVHW
Move the cursor to the rate item you want to
change and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
[Operation point setting (ACT POS)]
*The operation point at which the acceleration setting will
occur. If this point is exceeded, acceleration is performed.
Move the cursor to the [ACT POS] item and
hold the throttle stick to the position you
want to change and touch the RTN button
for one second.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the needle stroke is large, adjust your
settings so there is no binding of your linkage.
Ɣ(QJLQHFXWVHWWLQJ
* Operation linked with the throttle hold function, throttle cut
function, and idle down function is possible. The throttle cut
position can be adjusted accordingly. Set it to the full closed
position.
Move the cursor to the throttle cut or idle
down item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the servo position by scrolling the
touch sensor.
Initial value: THR CUT: 17, IDLE DOWN: 0
Adjustment range: THR CUT: 0~50, IDLE
DOWN: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
6HWWLQJPHWKRG
%HIRUHXVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQDVVLJQWKH>)8(/0,;@IXQFWLRQ
WRDQXQXVHGFKDQQHOLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQX>)81&7,21@
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
2. Move the cursor to the [MIX] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the mixing mode you want to change
by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to change the mode
and return to the cursor mode.
:KHQ>0,;@LVVHOHFWHGDWWKH>0,;@LFRQWKHWKURWWOHFXUYH
GDWDWKDWLVVHWEHFRPHVWKHPL[PDVWHU:KHQ>810,;@LV
selected, the throttle stick position becomes the master.
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the point rate setting item
you want to adjust and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
Ɣ1HHGOHKLJKWULPVHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the needle high trim
selection item and access the switch setup
screen by touching the RTN button. Select
the needle high trim lever.
)RUDGHWDLOHGGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH>6ZLWFK
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
2. Move the cursor to the TRIM rate item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -30~30
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
116
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
MODEL MENU (AIRPLANE/GLIDER FUNCTIONS)
The dedicated mixes, etc. that are applicable
when an airplane or glider model type is selected
are displayed in this Model menu functions
section. Prior to adjusting any of these mixes, etc.
use the Model Type function in the Linkage menu
to select the model type, wing type, and tail type
matched to the aircraft. Other settings reset the
data used in mixing function, etc.
For glider, many dedicated mixes can be set
for each flight condition, as required. To switch
the settings for each condition by switch or stick
position, use the Condition Select function to add
flight conditions. (Up to five conditions can be
used)
Note: The FX-22 is designed so that the airplane and
glider model types can utilize aircraft of the same
wing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders, with
the exception of some dedicated functions, are
written without regard to the model type.
While there may be differences, depending on the
number of servos, etc. the wing type used, etc. the
setup screens in the instruction manual are typical
examples.
Model Menu functions list
PITCH CURVE
Compatible with VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller)
function. [Airplane, general]
THR CURVE
THR curve function adjusts the throttle operation
curve for optimum engine speed to throttle stick
movement. [Airplane/glider, general]
THR DELAY
THR-DELAY function is used to slow the
response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow
response of a turbine engine, etc. [Airplane,
general]
AIL DIFFERENTIAL
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. For glider, the differential
UDWHLQEXWWHUÀ\PL[LQJFDQEHDGMXVWHG
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
FLAP SETTING
7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORIHDFKÀDSFDQEHDGMXVWHG
independently for each servo according to the wing
W\SH>$LUSODQHJOLGHUÀDSVRUPRUH@
AIL to CAMB.FLP
7KLVPL[RSHUDWHVWKHFDPEHUÀDSVLQWKHDLOHURQ
mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics.
>$LUSODQHJOLGHUDLOHURQVÀDSVRUPRUH@
AIL to BRKFLP
7KLVPL[RSHUDWHVWKHEUDNHÀDSVLQWKHDLOHURQ
mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics.
>*OLGHUÀDSV@
*The Model menu screen depends on
the model type.
ŏ Access the model menu shown below by
touching the MDL button twice at the home
screen, etc.
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
ŏ Select the function
you want to set and
access the setup
screen by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving
cursor
ŏ To next page
RETURN
117
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
(ELEVATOR 2)
V-TAIL AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
RUDDER 2
Winglet
RUDDER 1
RUDDER
(RUDDER 2)
Winglet
at Flying wing at Flying wing
( )
( )
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
(AILERON 5)
(AILERON 6)
AIL to RUD
This mix is used when you want to coordinate
the rudder with aileron operation for banking at
shallow angles. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to AIL
This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. Rudder is applied
GXULQJUROOLQJPDQHXYHUVVXFKDVNQLIHHGJHÀLJKW
[Airplane/glider, general]
CAMBER MIX
This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the
elevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
ELE to CAMBER
This mix is used when you want to the mix
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRUWRLQFUHDVHWKHOLIWRIWKH
model. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
CAMB.FLP to ELE
This mix is used to correct for changes in attitude
when the camber flaps are utilized. [Airplane/
JOLGHUDLOHURQVÀDSRUPRUH@
BUTTERFLY (Crow)
This function is used to quickly slow the aircraft
and/or reduce the altitude. [Glider, 2 ailerons or
PRUH)O\LQJDLOHURQVÀDSRUPRUH@
TRIM MIX
7KHDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVDQGÀDSVWULPRIIVHWUDWH
can be accessed by selecting a switch or condition
selection as desired. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]
AIRBRAKE
This function is used when airbrakes are
necessary when landing or when diving, etc. during
ÀLJKW$LUSODQHDLOHURQVRUPRUH
GYRO
This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro
is used. [Airplane/glider, general]
V-TAIL
This function incorporates the elevators and
rudder input for use with V-tail models. [Airplane/
JOLGHU9WDLOVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@
AILEVATOR (DUAL ELEVATOR)
This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons
of models with elevator specifications. [Airplane/
JOLGHUDLOHYDWRUVSHFL¿FDWLRQV@
WINGLET
This function adjusts the left and right rudders
of winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet
VSHFL¿FDWLRQV@
MOTOR
This function adjusts the operation speed when
the motor of an F5B or other such EP glider is
started by a switch. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to ELE
This function is used to correct rolling maneuvers
VXFKDVNQLIHHGJHÀLJKW>$LUSODQHJHQHUDO@
SNAP ROLL
This function selects the snap roll switch and
adjusts the amount of servo input. Servo speed can
also be adjusted. [Airplane general]
118
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
This function adjusts the pitch curve for VPP
(Variable Pitch Propeller) airplane.
*Up to 3 conditions can be set.
7KHSULRULW\LQFUHDVHVLQFRQGLWLRQĺĺRUGHU
NOTE: When VPP is not assigned to any
channel, the pitch curve is not displayed in
the model menu. In this case, assign VPP to
any channel on the function screen.
ŏ Select [PIT CURVE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
ŏCurve rate
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
PIT CURVE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
Setting method
Ɣ933FRQGLWLRQVHOHFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the # button at the top
right side of the screen and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the VPP condition by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to call the setting
screen and return to the cursor mode.
2. Move the cursor to the switch item and
touch the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the switch and set its ON
direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Set the VPP condition 2 and 3 switch.
*The VPP conditions can also be checked in the HOME
screen.
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:
75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.
ŏCurve point
119
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
This function adjusts the throttle curve for
optimum engine speed from throttle stick input.
*When throttle curve is set to ON when there is no throttle
function; this curve acts as the motor function.
NOTE: If this throttle curve function is activated,
you can not use the THR-EXP function within
the DUAL RATE function simultaneously.
ŏ Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
ŏCurve rate
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
THR CURVE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:
75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.
ŏCurve point
120
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
THR-DELAY function is used to slow the
response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow
response of a turbine engine, etc.
*This function is the same as THR of servo speed. If it sets up
in great numbers, it overlaps and a THR servo becomes late
further. Please do not let me overlap. Use either.
ŏ Select [THR DELAY] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
THR DELAY
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
Setting method
Ɣ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGGHOD\VHWWLQJ
1. Move the cursor to the [DELAY] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the delay rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
121
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL DIFF.
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently.
)RUJOLGHUWKHGLIIHUHQWLDOUDWHLQEXWWHUÀ\PL[LQJ
can be adjusted.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
Setting method
Ɣ$LOHURQOHIWULJKWDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron (AIL) 1~4 left (or
right) setting item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the aileron angles by scrolling the
touch sensor when the stick is moved to the
left (or right) end.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: 0~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏ Select [AIL DIFF.] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
[Airplane (2A2F)]
[Glider (4A2F)]
ŏ Aileron left/right
adjustment
Ɣ$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDODGMXVWPHQWLQEXWWHUÀ\
mixing
Move the cursor to the [BUTTERFLY AD-UST]
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the differential rate by scrolling the
touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
122
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
FLAP SET.
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 Áaps or more
7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORIHDFKÀDSFDPEHUÀDSV
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently for each servo according to the
wing type.
ŏ The operation reference point of each Áap can be
offset
The camber flaps of a 4-flap model can
be mixed with the brake flaps. (BRKFLP to
CMBFLP)
ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Setting method
Ɣ)ODSXSGRZQDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 1~4 Up or
Down item according to the wing type and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Adjust the travel independently
by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ5HIHUHQFHSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Adjust the operation reference
point of each flap by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the
reference point is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKH%UDNH)/3WR&DPEHU)/3PL[LQJ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
To select a switch, move the cursor to the
[SW] item and touch the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
ŏ Select [FLAP SET.] at the Model menu and access the setup
screen shown below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
ŏOperation reference
point offset
ŏ Up /Down
adjustment
123
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
AIL to CMBFLP
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons 2 flaps or
more
This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick
is manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously to
VLJQL¿FDQWO\LPSURYHWKHUROOD[LV
ŏ The aileron left/right mixing rate of each Áap servo
can be independently adjusted.
ŏ An ON/OFF switch can be set.
ŏ Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.
ŏ Adjustment of each
Áap servo
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 1~2 left
or right item according to the wing type
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
When linking a mix, move the cursor to the
[LINK] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to set the link mode
and return to the cursor mode.
ŏ Select [AIL to CMBFLP] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
124
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
AIL to BRAKEFLP
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 4 Áaps
This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick is
PDQLSXODWHGWKHDLOHURQDQGEUDNHÀDSVSHUIRUP
the aileron operation simultaneously and the roll
axis is improved.
ŏ The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted separately for each Áap servo.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
ŏ Select [AIL to BRKFLP] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Adjustment of each
Áap servo
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Currently selected condition name)
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 3~4 left or
right item and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Adjust the mixing
rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
To activate the mixing, move the cursor to
the [LINK] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to set the link mode
and return to the cursor mode.
125
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
RUDDER 2
RUDDER
RUDDER
V-TAIL
RUDDER 2
Winglet
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
at Flying wing
( )
( )
AIL 3
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL to RUD
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft to
bank at a steep angle.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by a
switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ The mixing rate can be adjusted.
ŏ Select [AIL to RUD] at the
Model menu and access the
setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on the
model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the left or right item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
126
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
RUDDER 2
RUDDER
RUDDER
V-TAIL
RUDDER 2
Winglet
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
at Flying wing
( ) ( )
AIL 3
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
RUD to AIL
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. It is used when
rudder is applied during roll maneuvers such
as, knife edge flight. It can be used to turn or
bank scale models, large models, etc. like a full-
size aircraft.
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
ŏ The mixing rate can also be adjusted.
ŏ A 5-point curve can be set at airplane model type.
ŏ Select [RUD to AIL] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on the
model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQWJOLGHU
Move the cursor to the left or right item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
To activate the link mixing, move the cursor
to the [LINK] item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to set the link mode
and return to the cursor mode.
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
127
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJDLUSODQH
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item (left side) you want to adjust and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.
128
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
CAMBER MIX
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber
flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive
directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rates
can also be adjusted independently and attitude
changes caused by camber operation can be
corrected.
*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.
ŏ The up/down rates of the aileron, flap, and
elevator servos can be adjusted. When the mixing
direction is reversed by the linkage, adjustments
can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity ( or -).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ A condition delay can be set. A cut switch which
can turn OFF the delay function can be set.
ŏCondition delay
cut switch
ŏCondition delay
setting
ŏAileron rate
adjustment
(Glider: Currently selected
condition name)
ŏ Select [CAMBER MIX] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏFlap rate
adjustment
ŏElevator rate
adjustment
129
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ&RQGLWLRQGHOD\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [COND.DELAY] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the condition delay
by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
When setting a cut switch, move the cursor
to the [CUT-SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ5DWHDGMXVWPHQW
The rates are adjusted by accessing the
aileron, Áap, and elevator rate screens.
Move the cursor to the rate1 or rate2
item and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Adjust the rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
130
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
ELE to CAMBER
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used when you want to mix the
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQ:KHQXVHG
the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift is
increased.
ŏ In-Áight mixing can be turned ON/OFF by assigning
this to a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ The mixing rate can be adjusted.
ŏ The point that has little effect near the neutral
position of the elevator stick can be adjusted.
(Glider only)
1RWH7KHHOHYDWRURQWKHWDLOOHVVZLQJZLOODOVR
EHHIIHFWHGZKHQWKLVPL[LVDFWLYDWHG
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the up or down mixing
rate item for each servo and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ5DQJHVHWWLQJ*OLGHURQO\
Move the cursor to the [RANGE] item and
hold the elevator stick to the desired position
(upper or lower side) and then touch the RTN
button for one second to set the range.
*The mixing does not work near neutral of the elevator stick.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~100
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
ŏ Select [ELE to CAMBER] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.
*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on the
model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
131
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
CMBFLP to ELE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider,
2 ailerons 1 Áap or more
When the camber/speed flaps are utilized,
the aircraft might experience, a change in pitch.
This mix compensates for such changes by
incorporating elevator input.
ŏ The elevator servos up/down rates can be
adjusted separately. If the mixing direction is
reversed, change the mixing rate polarity ( or ²).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ Elevator rate
adjustment
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the RATE1 or RATE2 item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
ŏ Select [CMBFLP to ELE] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
132
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
BUTTERFLY
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, Normal: 2 ailerons or more
Flying: 2 ailerons 1 Áap or more
This function is utilized to quickly slow the
aircraft and reduce altitude by simultaneously
raising the left and right ailerons and lowering the
ÀDSVFDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS
Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely
HI¿FLHQWODQGLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQE\DFFRPSOLVKLQJ
the following:
1. Slow the aircraft·s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
3. Create more lift toward the center of the
wing allowing it to Áy at a slower speed
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ The point at which the butterfly operation
reference point can be offset.
ŏ The operational speed of the ailerons and flaps
can be adjusted.
ŏ The differential rate can be adjusted.
*For a description of the setting method, see the aileron
differential function.
ŏButterÁy operation reference point
ŏ Select [BUTTERFLY] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏ Servo speed setting
ŏElevator adjustment
ŏAileron/Áap rate
adjustment
133
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ5DWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator rate item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -200~200 (Elevator:
-120~120)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ(OHYDWRUFRPSHQVDWLRQFXUYHDGMXVWPHQW
Output (Y) Position (X)
Offset point Fixed (0) Fixed (offset
position)
2- Intermediate point Settable Settable
1- End point Settable Fixed
* The range where mixing does not work close to the neutral
position of the elevator stick can be adjusted. (Glider only)
*When offset is set, the curve is initialized.
Ɣ5HIHUHQFHSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item and
hold the airbrake stick to the desired position
and then touch the RTN button for one
second to set the butterfly operational
reference point.
Initial value: 15 (upper side)
Adjustment range: 0~100
Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator speed item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
134
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TRIM MIX
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function adjusts the trim offset rates of the
DLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVDQGÀDSVFDPEHUÀDSVEUDNH
ÀDSVDFFRUGLQJWRWKHÀLJKWVWDWXV
As an example this function can be set up for
ODXQFKLQJZLWKVSHHGÀDSVDQGDLOHURQVGURRSHG
and a slight amount of up elevator, and can be
XVHGIRUKLJKVSHHGÀ\LQJZLWKERWKDLOHURQVDQG
speed flaps reflexed slightly, and a bit of down
elevator.
To prevent sudden trim changes when switching
ÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDGHOD\FDQEHVHWWRSURYLGHD
ŏ Select [TRIM MIX] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
smooth transition between the two conditions. It
is also possible to program a cut switch which
will turn off the delay.
Furthermore, you can set the auto switch, which
will link the trim mix to a stick, switch, or dial.
Additionally, the speed of the aileron, elevator,
DQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQEHDGMXVWHG
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏ Condition delay
setting
ŏ Ailerons, flaps, and
elevators servo speed
setting
ŏAuto switch selection
ŏ Ailerons, flaps, and
elevators offset rate
ŏ Switch
selection
135
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the switch item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ7ULPRIIVHWUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator rate item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -250~250
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ&RQGLWLRQGHOD\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [COND.DELAY] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the condition delay
by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
When setting a cut switch, move the cursor
to the [CUT-SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator speed item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ$XWRVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
When selecting an auto switch, move the
cursor to the [AUTO-SW] item and touch the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
(Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
136
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
AIRBRAKE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used to increase the aircraft's
drag and is useful for landing or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap,
brake flap) offset amount can be activated by a
switch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and
flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
VSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQ
be adjusted. If the Auto Mode is activated, this
will link the Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A
separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the
ON/OFF switch.
6HWWLQJH[DPSOHIRU)$DQGRWKHUÀDSHURQVSHFL¿FDWLRQV
(When 2 ailerons model type selected)
Offset rate:
AIL: [-35~-45], AIL2: [-35~-45], ELE: [5~7]
Note: The input numerics are examples. Adjust the travel to
match the aircraft.
Mode setting:
ACT: [ON]
Switch: [SW-C]
AUTO-SW: [--]
ŏ Select [AIRBRAKE] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
*The display screen is an example. The
actual screen depends on the model type.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Ailerons, flaps, and
elevators servo speed
setting
ŏAuto switch selection
ŏ Ailerons, flaps, and
elevators offset rate
ŏ Switch
selection
137
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the switch item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ2IIVHWUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator rate item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -250~250
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator speed item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ$XWRVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
When setting a auto switch, move the cursor
to the [AUTO-SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
138
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
GYRO
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
This function is used when a GYA Series gyro
is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be changed via a switch.
ŏ Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be
switched.
ŏ Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.
Note: This setting does not assign a sensitivity
channel. To do so, use the Linkage menu
prior to assigning the sensitivity channel
(Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3), be sure to select an
unused channel.
Set the [Control] and [Trim] settings other than
Function to [--].
ŏ The operation mode (AVCS/NOR)
and sensitivity of the three axis
Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3 can be set.
ŏ Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Active rate # display)
ŏ Gyro type
selection
ŏ ACT/INH
ŏ Switch selection
ŏ Rate1-3 setup
screen selection
[Rate 1 setup screen]
[Rate 2 setup screen]
[Rate 3 setup screen]
Setting method
*Prior to using the Function menu in the Linkage menu to
assign the sensitivity channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) select an
unused channel.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than function to [--].
Ɣ5DWHVHWXSVFUHHQVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the setup screen selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Select the setup
screen # by scrolling the touch sensor.
Touch the RTN button to change the setup
screen and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [INH] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode.
139
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
When setting a rate selection switch, move
the cursor to the switch item and touch the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
(Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ*\URW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the gyro type selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Select the gyro type
by scrolling the touch sensor.
[GY]: When a Futaba GYA gyro is used
[NORM]: When using something other than
Futaba GYA gyro is used.
Touch the RTN button to change the gyro
type and return to the cursor mode.
*When a Futaba GYA gyro is used and [GY] type is selected,
the sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS
and NORM modes.
Ɣ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHOHFWLRQ*<$J\UR
Move the cursor to the operation mode
selection item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select
the operation mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
[AVCS]: AVCS mode
[NORM]: Normal mode
Touch the RTN button to change the
operation mode and return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ6HQVLWLYLW\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the sensitivity icon and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
([DPSOH6HWWLQJWKUHHD[LVXVLQJD*<$DQG*<$
ŏ Wing type: Aileron 2 servos mounted fuselage selected
ŏ Set
5CH → GYRO
(GYA431AIL),
7CH → GYRO2
(GYA431ELE),
8CH → GYRO3
(GYA430RUD),
CTRL
and TRIM → [--]
: at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
ŏ GYRO setting of the Model menu.
*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since
switch E is turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].
R7008SB
Rudder servo
Elevator servo
GYA430
GYA431
GYA431
Aileron servo
S.BUS/S.BUS2 port
:KHQD6%86SRUWLV
XVHG56%&+0RGH
LVVHWWR0RGH%>'@
GAIN 0％
AVCS
NORMAL
When AVCS is used we
recommend that the
sensitivity CH be set to
the 3-position.
Rate GYRO GYRO ２ GYRO ３ TYPE ACT/INH SW
#1 AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60% GY OFF/ON SE
#2 INH
#3 NORM : 60% NORM : 60% NORM : 60% GY ON/OFF SE
140
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
ELEVATOR
(RUDDER 2)
RUDDER
(ELEVATOR 2)
V-TAIL
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, V-tail
This function enables adjustments for left and
right rudder angle changes during elevator and
rudder operation of a V-tail airplane.
V-tail is when two servos are used together to
control rudder movement as elevators. In addition
to each elevator side moving up and down together,
each side moves in opposite directions when moving
as rudders. On a V-tail, this is also known as a
Ruddervator, as they serve the same purpose.
(Rudder function)
Left and right travel
adjustment of rudder
operation
(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment of
elevator operation
ŏ Select [V-TAIL] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the item you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 50
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made
by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of
travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
141
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
(AILERON 5)
(AILERON 6)
AILEVATOR
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Ailevator
(Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)
This function improves the performance of the roll
axis by operating the elevators as ailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard
(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, like
ailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an Ailevator. On
a V-tail, this is also known as a Ruddervator, as they
can serve the same purpose. Typically, both Ailevator
and ailerons are coupled together to maximize roll
performance, especially on larger wingspan planes.
Note: Select Ailevator as the Model Type at the Model
Type screen. This changes the output channel. Check
the Function menu.
(Aileron function)
ŏ When the elevators are used
as ailerons, aileron travel of
the left and right elevators
can be adjusted.
(Elevator function)
ŏ The up and down rate of both
elevators when the elevator stick
is moved can be individually
adjusted.
ŏ Select [AILEVATOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the item you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: ELE: 100, AIL: 0
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made
by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of
travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
142
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
( )
RUDDER 2
Winglet
at Flying wing
( )
WINGLET
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Flying wing only
This function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
Winglets are used to improve the efficiency of
aircraft by lowering the lift-induced drag caused by
wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled
extension located at the tip of each wing.
Winglets work by increasing the effective aspect
ratio wing without adding greatly to the structural
stress and hence necessary weight of its structure
- an extension of wing span would also permit
lowering of induced drag, though it would cause
parasitic drag and would require boosting the
strength of the wing and hence its weight. There
would come a point at which no overall useful
gains would be made. A winglet helps to solve this
by effectively increasing the aspect ratio without
adding to the span of the wing.
(Rudder 1/2)
ŏ The travel during rudder stick operation
can be individually adjusted.
ŏ Select [WINGLET] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the item you want to
adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 100
Adjustment range: -120~120
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, change the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
143
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
MOTOR
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
This function lets you set the speed when the
motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started via
a switch. The operation speed can be set for two
ranges, slow speed flight and high speed flight
(Speed 1/Speed 2). This function can also be
operated as a safety function by programming it to
a switch.
ŏ The In side and Out side operating speeds can
be adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
ŏ The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From Speed 1 to Speed 2)
ŏ The operational speed can only be activated at
the initial operation. However, operation can be
repeated by setting the switch to OFF before the
operation is Ànished. When you want to reset one
time operation, set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and
then reset it to [ON].
ŏ The motor channel is controlled by SW-G. (Glider:
Initial setting) When changing the switch or stick
which controls the motor, Àrst change Function of
the Linkage menu.
ŏ If the Model Type selected is Airplane, the MOTOR
function is changed from INH to ON and it is not
assigned to another channel, the changes from
the throttle channel to the motor channel are
enabled.
Note: Initial setting does not assign a motor
channel according to the model type. Prior to
DVVLJQLQJWKHPRWRUFKDQQHOÀQGDQXQXVHG
channel. Then, use the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.
Set [Control] to the switch you want to use
and [Trim] to [--].
Note: When using this function, always check
the initial operation with the propeller
removed.
ŏ Select [MOTOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT/INH] item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the
[ACT] by scrolling the touch sensor and touch
the RTN button.
When selecting the ON/OFF switch, move the
cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ0RWRURIISRVLWLRQVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MOTOR OFF] item
and touch the RTN button for one second
when the motor function switch (SG, etc.) is
in the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
The screen graph display OFF direction also
changes.
Note:
ŏ)LUVWGHFLGHWKHPRWRU2))GLUHFWLRQDQGWKHQ
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
ŏ:HUHFRPPHQGWKDW0RWRU2))EHVHWLQ
combination with F/S.
ŏ6HWWKHEDVLF RSHUDWLRQGLUHFWLRQZLWKWKH
Reverse function to match the ESC used.
ŏ$OZD\VVHWWKH0RWRU2))SRVLWLRQ
144
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPRWRUVSHHGIXQFWLRQ
When using motor speed function, move the
cursor to the [INH] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the [ACT] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button.
Ɣ6LIWLQJWKHERXQGDU\EHWZHHQWKHUDQJHV
Move the cursor to the [SPEED 1!2] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the boundary position by scrolling the
touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the [IN] (on to off) or [OUT]
(off to on) item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the operation speed you want to set
by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ6HW5HVHWWKHRQHWLPHRSHUDWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ONE TIME] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the [ACT] by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button to set the one time
operation.
* When you want to reset one time operation, set the ACT/
INH item to [INH] and then reset it to [ON].
ŏ Motor function switch
current position
Ɣ6WDUWVZLWFKIXQFWLRQ
When active, the "START SW" allows the
motor's state to change from OFF to ON. The
motor is ON when the main SW and "START
SW" are turned ON simultaneously. The motor
changes to OFF only when the main SW is
turned off. If "START SW" is turned OFF but the
main SW is still ON, the motor remains ON.
[START SW function example]
When the throttle (motor) stick is assigned as the "START SW",
and the low throttle position of the throttle curve is adjusted, the
motor starts operating with the initial stick movement. The motor
will not cease functionality even if the stick position is returned to
it's lowest setting.
Ɣ7ULPHIIHFWLQYDOLGVHWWLQJLQPRWRU2))
If one of the trim levers is assigned to the
Motor function, it is possible to turn the
motor off with the trim lever. To maintain
compatibility after updating the FX-22/S, the
trim setting is adjusted to the on position.
However, it is suggested to return it to the off
position accordingly in the programming of
the transmitter.
*Data Reset will return the trim setting to the off position.
Ɣ6FUHHQDWWKHWLPHRIWKHPRWRU2))VHWWLQJ
When the MOTOR OFF setting is highlighted,
you will note the presence of the small cursor
that indicates the MOTOR OFF position. To
adjust this MOTOR OFF position, use the
throttle stick to move the cursor accordingly.
When satisfied with this position, press and
hold the RTN button on the transmitter.
*The larger cursor is used to indicate the output of the motor
FKDQQHO7KLVFXUVRUUHÀHFWV DQ\WKURWWOHFXUYHVDQGPRWRU
mixing which may be active.
Ɣ7KURWWOHFXUYHEXWWRQ
When "CURVE" button is chosen, a throttle
curve screen opens.
*When a throttle function is assigned to either channel, the
"CURVE" button is not displayed because a throttle curve
does not function as a motor curve.
ŏ ON/OFF direction
145
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
RUD to ELE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder is
applied in rolling maneuvers such as, knife edge
ÀLJKW
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
ŏ Link mixing can be set: Links this mix to other mixes.
ŏ Select [RUD to ELE] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHIXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to activate the
function and return to the cursor mode. (ON
is displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and touch the RTN button to
call the selection screen. Select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJDLUSODQH
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item (left side) you want to adjust and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Adjustment range: -100~100
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.
Ɣ/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJ
When selecting the link mixing, move the
cursor to the [LINK] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*The display blinks.
Touch the RTN button to set the link mode
and return to the cursor mode.
146
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SNAP ROLL
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function selects the switch and rate
adjustment of ailerons, elevators, and rudder when
a snap roll is performed.
ŏ Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)
ŏ Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by the
master switch. It is possible to set the direction
switch was switched to the direction in which you
want to snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected,
the snap roll in each direction can be executed
by means of independent switches and positions.
ŏ A safety switch can be set to prevent the
inadvertent activation of the snap roll. For
example, the landing gear is lowered, even if
the switch is turned on accidentally the snap roll
would not be executed. The snap roll switch is
activated only when the safety switch is OFF.
([DPSOH6HWWLQJH[DPSOHIRU)$
ŏ Mode: [Master]
ŏ Safety SW: [SG] (Safety measure)
ŏ Master SW: [SH] (Main switch for executing
snap roll)
ŏ Direction switches:
*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left and right
direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: OFF [SD]
Right/Down: OFF [SD]
Left/Up: OFF [SA]
Left/Down: OFF [SA]
ŏ Master/single mode
selection
ŏ Select [SNAP ROLL] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
ŏ Direction switches
147
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>
Setting method
Ɣ0DVWHUVLQJOHPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Select the master or single
mode by scrolling the touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
[MASTER]: Master mode
[SINGLE]: Single mode
Touch the RTN button to select the mode
and return to the cursor mode.
When setting a master switch, move the
cursor to the [MASTER-SW] item and touch
the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the switch and set its ON
direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
When setting a safety switch, move the
cursor to the [SAFETY-SW] item and touch the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
Ɣ'LUHFWLRQVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the direction switch item
and touch the RTN button to access the
selection screen. Select the switch and set its
ON direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Ɣ5DWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the aileron, elevator or
rudder item for each direction and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the touch sensor.
Initial value: (Dependent upon the snap roll
direction)
Adjustment range: -150~150
*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
148
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
MODEL MENU (HELICOPTER)
This section contains information on the
commands that apply to helicopters only. For
instructions on Airplanes and Sailplanes, refer to
the sections pertaining to those aircraft.
Use the Model Type function in the Linkage
Menu to select the swash type matched to the
respective aircraft.
Also, activate/deactivate flight conditions
according to your model. To do so, access at the
Condition Select screen prior to adjusting the
PRGHOVSDUDPHWHUV8SWR¿YHFRQGLWLRQVFDQEH
used)
The Dual Rate function and other functions
FRPPRQWRDOOPRGHOW\SHVKDYHDOUHDG\EHHQ
GHVFULEHGHOVHZKHUHLQWKLVPDQXDO3OHDVHUHIHUWR
these respective sections for information on how to
do so.
Model Menu functions (helicopter) list
PIT CURVE:$GMXVWVSLWFKVHWWLQJVLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
THR CURVE:7KURWWOHFXUYHDQGKRYHULQJWULPDGMXVWPHQWLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
THR HOLD: Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation
SWASH MIX:&RPSHQVDWHVFRQWUROUHVSRQVHLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
THROTTLE MIX: Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied
PIT to NEEDLE:$GMXVWVSLWFKUHVSRQVHLQGLIIHUHQWÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
PIT to RUD: Compensates torque changes from pitch angle inputs
GYRO: Used to switch gyro sensitivity
GOVERNOR:8VHGWRVZLWFK530RIWKHKHOLFRSWHUVKHDG
ŏ Access the Model menu shown below by
touching the RTN button twice at the home
screen, etc.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ To next page
ŏ Select the function you
want to set and access
the setup screen by
touching the RTN button.
149
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
PIT CURVE/PIT TRIM
Pitch Curve
This function adjusts the pitch operation curve
for each flight condition to optmize the model's
performance in relationship to the throttle stick position.
$VLPSOHFXUYHFDQEHFUHDWHGE\UHGXFLQJWKHQXPEHURI
LQSXWSRLQWVWRWZRRUWKUHHDQGWKHQHQWHULQJWKHVSHFL¿HG
value at the corresponding points.
Normal curve adjustment
)RUQRUPDOFXUYHFUHDWHDEDVLFSLWFKFXUYHFHQWHUHG
DERXWKRYHULQJ8VHWKLVIXQFWLRQWRJHWKHUZLWKWKH7+5
Curve (Normal) function and adjust the curve so that up/
GRZQFRQWUROLVEHVWDWDFRQVWDQWHQJLQHVSHHG
Idle up curve adjustment
*For the high side pitch curve, set the maximum pitch
so that it does not overload the engine. For the low side
pitch curve, create curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, and
other purposes and use the idle up curves according to the
performance.
Throttle hold curve adjustment
*The throttle hold curve is used when executing auto
rotations.
Operation precautions
Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying,
always set the idle up condition switch to OFF
and start the engine at idle.
ŏ Select [PIT CURVE] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
ŏ Pitch curve copy
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Currently selected condition name)
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.
Ɣ3LWFKFXUYHFRS\IXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to COPY and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and touch the RTN
button.
ŏ curve rate
ŏ curve point
Setting method
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: P1: -100, P2: -50, P3: 0, P4:
50, P5: 100
Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:
75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of the
adjoining point
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHFXUYH
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
*The graph display includes the pitch
trim operation.
150
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve Hold Curve
Ɣ3LWFK Curve ([ample
7KHVFUHHQVVKRZQEHORZDUHFXUYHVFUHDWHGE\
entering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3
points or 5 points) at each condition.
When actually creating a curve, input the rate
VSHFL¿HGE\WKHPRGHORUWKHUHIHUHQFHYDOXH
Curve setting examples
Pitch Trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)
[Hovering pitch trim setting]
Hovering pitch trim
7KH+RYHULQJ3LWFKWULPIXQFWLRQWULPVWKHSLWFK
near the hovering point. Normally, it is used with
WKHKRYHULQJFRQGLWLRQ7KHKRYHULQJSLWFKFDQEH
¿QHWXQHGIRUFKDQJHVLQURWRUVSHHGDFFRPSDQ\LQJ
FKDQJHVLQWHPSHUDWXUHKXPLGLW\DQGRWKHUÀLJKW
conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so that
URWRUVSHHGLVFRQVWDQW7KLVIXQFWLRQFDQEHXVHG
WRJHWKHUZLWKWKH+RYHULQJ7KURWWOH7ULPIXQFWLRQ
for more precise operation.
Setting method
ŏ Set the function to ACT [ON]. (initial setting)
ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD (initial setting)
ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/
NORM) can be selected.
CTRM mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation
(recommended)
NORM mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be changed.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
151
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
[Low/High pitch trim setting]
High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim
+LJK3LWFK/RZ3LWFK7ULPLVWKHSLWFKVHUYR
high side and low side trim function.
Setting method
ŏ Set the function to ACT (ON).
ŏ Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (low
side)
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be changed.
ŏ Trim acts as high side or low side trim with the
center as the standard.
152
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
THR CURVE/THROTTLE HOVER TRIM
Throttle Curve
Throttle curve function adjusts the throttle
operation curve for each condition to optimize the
engine speed to throttle stick movement.
7KH7KURWWOH+RYHUIXQFWLRQWULPVWKHWKURWWOH
near the hovering point. Normally, use it with
hovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed
accompanying changes in the temperature,
KXPLGLW\DQGRWKHUIOLJKWFRQGLWLRQVFDQEH
trimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation is
PRVWVWDEOH0RUHSUHFLVHWULPPLQJLVDOVRSRVVLEOH
E\XVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQDORQJZLWKWKH+RYHU3LWFK
function.
ŏ Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
*The graph display includes the throttle
hover trim operation.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏ Throttle curve copy
ŏ curve rate
ŏ curve point
Normal curve adjustment
1RUPDOFXUYHFUHDWHVDEDVLFFXUYHFHQWHUHG DURXQG
hovering. Use it along with the normal pitch curve and
adjust so that up/down control results in a constant engine
speed.
Idle up curve adjustment
*Set a idle up curve that maintains a constant speed at all
times, even during operation which reduces the pitch
SHUIRUPHGLQÀLJKW&UHDWHDFXUYHPDWFKHGWRORRSUROO
3D, or other purposes and the idle up curve according to
the performance.
Operation precautions
Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying,
always set the idle up condition switch to OFF
and start the engine at the idle.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and touch
the RTN button for one second.
Ɣ7KURWWOHFXUYHFRS\IXQFWLRQ
Move the COPY item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and touch the RTN
button.
Setting method
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: P1: 0, P2: 25, P3: 50, P4: 75,
P5: 100
Adjustment range: 0~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: P1: (0), P2: 25, P3: 50, P4:
75, P5: (100)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5 in front of the
adjoining point
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHFXUYH
position is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.
Repeat this procedure for each point as desired.
153
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve
Ɣ7KroWWle Curve ([ample
7KHFXUYHVVKRZQEHORZDUHFUHDWHGE\LQSXWWLQJ
the data of the 5 points 0% (low side), 25%,
50% (center), 75%, 100% (high) side for each
condition. When actually creating a curve, enter the
SDUDPHWHUVVSHFL¿HGSHUWKHPRGHORUWKHUHIHUHQFH
value).
Curve setting examples
Throttle Hover trim
Setting method
ŏ Set the function to ACT ([ON]). (initial setting)
ŏ Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD (initial setting)
ŏ The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/
NORM) can be selected.
CTRM mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation
(recommended)
NORM mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
ŏ The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be set.
ŏ Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
With smaller values, the trim is only active
near the center.
[Throttle hover trim setting]
154
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
Throttle limiter function
Setting method
*Set at the 3rd page of the throttle curve screen.
•Activate the function.
1. Select ACT and touch the RTN button.
2. Switch the display to ACT by scrolling the
touch sensor.
*The display blinks.
INH: Inhibit
ACT: Activate
3. Enter the selection by touching the RTN
button.
•ON/OFF switch setting
1. Select SW and touch the RTN button.
2. The H/W SET screen is displayed. Select the
hardware and touch the RTN button.
This function limits the high range of the throttle
PRYHPHQWE\DQ\VOLGHURUWULPPHU
&RQWUROZKLFKDGMXVWVWKHOLPLWSRLQWGXULQJÀLJKWFDQEHVHW
•High side operating range setting
1. Select HIGH and touch the RTN button.
2. Adjust the high side operating range by
scrolling the touch sensor.
*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.
3. Touch the RTN button to switch to the cursor
mode.
•Low side operating range setting
1. Select LOW and touch the RTN button.
2. Adjust the low side operating range by
scrolling the touch sensor.
*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.
3. Touch the RTN button to switch to the cursor
mode.
•Limiter operating range adjustment control
setting
1. Select CTRL and touch the RTN button.
2. The H/W SET screen is displayed. Select the
hardware and touch the RTN button.
7KHWKURWWOHOLPLWHURSHUDWLQJSRVLWLRQLVLQGLFDWHGE\D
dotted line on the graph.
*When limiter operating range adjustment control is NULL,
the throttle limiter function is not performed.
•Changing the control center position
1. Select CENTER and touch the RTN button for
1 second. CENTER changes from INH to ´rate
displayµ.
2. When the CENTER rate is changed, the
neutral position of the hardware set at CTRL
can be adjusted.
:KHQ&(17(5LV,1+WKHQHXWUDOSRVLWLRQEHFRPHVWKH
LOW intermediate value.
:KHQ&(17(5LVFKDQJHGIURP,1+WR³UDWHGLVSOD\´WKH
CENTER rate is set to the LOW intermediate value.
7KH&(17(5UDWHFDQEHVHWEHWZHHQ+,*+DQG/2:
[Throttle limiter setting]
When "CTRL" is set as a "RS" side slider.
The state of full high of a throttle stick.
RSPosition
Throttle
Position
Full
RestrictionRestrictionRestriction
Slow
Full
Slow
Full
Slow
In "INH", the halfway
point of "HIGH" and
"LOW".
HIGH
LOW
CENTER
155
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
THR HOLD
This function sets the throttle cut position for
auto rotation. The throttle servo operating speed
FDQEHDGMXVWHG6SHHG
Note: Initially, this setting does not assign the
throttle hold switch. Prior to adjusting the
parameters for the throttle hold, we suggest
designating a throttle hold switch. To do so,
access the Condition menu within the Model
menu options.
ŏServo speed
Setting method
Ɣ+ROGFRQGLWLRQVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
Use the Condition select menu of the Model
menu to assign the hold condition switch.
Selection example: SG
Ɣ+ROGSRVLWLRQDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the hold position item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 17
Adjustment range: 0~50
+ROGSRVLWLRQVHWVWKHWKURWWOHFXWSRVLWLRQ$GMXVWLWVRWKDW
WKHFDUEXUHWRULVFRPSOHWHO\FORVHG
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the servo speed item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
ŏ Select [THR HOLD] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏHold position setting
ŏHold position
ŏCurrent position
Operation precautions
Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying,
always set the idle up condition switch to OFF
and start the engine at idle.
156
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
SWASH MIX
The swash mix function is used to correct the
swash plate in the aileron (roll) direction and
elevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each
operation of each condition.
This function allows the independent rate
adjustments for the ailerons, elevator and pitch.
Example of use
ŏ As an example, use swash mixing to correct
undesirable roll tendencies.
ŏ For a condition which uses AIL to ELE, set this
function to ON.
If the front of the helicopter raises during a
right roll, when the Rate 2 side is input and
the right aileron is operated, the elevator
moves to the down side. Tune by adjusting
the Rate.
For left roll, adjust to the Rate 1 side.
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV
Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
[Switch selection]
When [ [--]] is set, the swash mixing function
is always active and operated by merely
selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, move the
cursor to the [SW] item and touch the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Set
the switch and its ON position.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the mixing rate item you
want to correct and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ
When changing the trim mode, move the
cursor to the [TRIM] item and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select ON/OFF by scrolling the touch sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV
Touch the RTN button to change the trim
mode ON/OFF and return to the cursor
mode.
*When mixing includes master side trim, select [ON] and
when mixing does not include master trim, select [OFF].
ŏ Select [SWASH MIX] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
0L L W GM
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏCondition selection
157
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
THROTTLE MIX
This function corrects slowing of engine speed
FDXVHGE\VZDVKSODWHRSHUDWLRQGXULQJDLOHURQ
or elevator operation. The method of applying
clockwise or counterclockwise torque when
SLURXHWWLQJFDQDOVREHFRUUHFWHG
Setting example
ŏ AIL to THR mixing counteracts the lag in
engine RPM's when an aileron input is given
to the helicopter. Engine over-speeding
can be adjusted independently for the
right aileron and left aileron inputs utilizing
Rates 1 and 2.
ŏ Select [THROTTLE MIX] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by touching
the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Currently selected condition name)
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV
Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
[Switch selection]
When [ [--]] is set, the swash mixing function
is always active and operated by merely
selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, move the
cursor to the [SW] item and touch the RTN
button to call the selection screen. Set the
switch and its ON position.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO
Ɣ0L[LQJUDWHDGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the mixing rate item you
want to correct and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the operation mode by scrolling the
touch sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV
CTRM mode: Corrects near the center only.
LIN. mode: Corrects the complete range.
Touch the RTN button to change the
operation mode and return to the cursor
mode.
ŏCondition selection
158
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
PIT to RUD mixing (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress the
UHDFWLRQWRUTXHJHQHUDWHGE\PDLQURWRUSLWFKDQG
speed changes during pitch operation. Adjust so
that the nose does not move in the rudder direction.
<Normal condition mixing curve>
The mixing curve rate should be started
using smaller values.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction, when pitch was input at the plus
side, set these parameters so that mixing
is in the clockwise direction. First, trim at
hovering and then adjust the neutral
position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm. Then adjust the pitch so that the
nose of the helicopter remains steady
when the throttle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving from
hovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that the nose
does not deflect when the throttle is raised
and lowered.
Note: When a GY Series or other heading hold
gyro is used, since correction is performed by
the gyro, this mix is not utilized. If this function
is used when the gyro operation mode is the
AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.
<Idle up condition mixing curve>
Set the mixing rate so that the rudder direction
at high-speed Áight is straight ahead. Adjust for
each condition used.
ŏ Select [PIT to RUD] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the
RTN button.
(Currently selected condition name)
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV
Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
ƔSRLQWFXUYHVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and touch the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: P1~P5: 0
Adjustment range: -100~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for each point.
Ɣ3LWFKFXUYHFRS\IXQFWLRQ
Move the cursor to COPY item and touch the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the touch sensor and touch the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and touch the RTN
button.
159
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
GYRO mixing
This function used to adjust gyro sensitivity.
The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
$9&6PRGHFDQEHVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ
7KHJ\URVHQVLWLYLW\FDQEHVZLWFKHGZLWKHDFK
condition or the switch. (5 sensitivities)
&RPSDWLEOHZLWKD[LVJ\UR&*<
ŏ Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and access the
setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
Note: When using the [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] function,
assign [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] to any channel on the
function screen.
Always set to [--] both (Control) and (Trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏMode selection:
[AVCS]/[NORM]
ŏGyro type selection:
[GY]/[NORM]
ŏSetup screen selection
ŏON: (initial setting)
ŏFine tuning VR settings
ŏGyro sensitivity adjustment
ŏCondition/Switch selection
ŏThe edit conditions can be
changed by touching the
S1 button.
*When the rate switching setting of
DOOWKHJ\URVLV³6ZLWFK´WKHHGLW
conditions are not displayed.
ŏThe edit rate can be changed by operating
the edit rate button.
*When the rate switching setting of all the gyros is
³&21'´WKHHGLWUDWHEXWWRQLVQRWGLVSOD\HG
ŏWhen the GYRO function button is selected,
each GYRO detailed setting screen
appears.
160
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
Setting method
Ɣ*\URW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the gyro type selection
item and touch the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Select the gyro type
by scrolling the touch sensor.
[GY]: When a Futaba GY gyro is used
[NORM]: When other than Futaba GY gyro is
used
Touch the RTN button to change the gyro
type and return to the cursor mode.
:KHQD)XWDED*<J\URLVXVHGDQG>*<@W\SHLVVHOHFWHG
WKHVHQVLWLYLW\VHWYDOXHLVGLUHFWO\UHDGLQERWKWKH$9&6
and NORM modes.
Ɣ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHOHFWLRQ*<J\UR
Move the cursor to the operation mode
selection item and touch the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select
the operation mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
[AVCS]: AVCS mode
[NORM]: Normal mode
Touch the RTN button to change the
operation mode and return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ6HQVLWLYLW\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 80
Adjustment range: 0~100
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKH
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ)LQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJV
Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the control.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO
Move the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -20~20
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKH
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
(;$03/(!5XGGHUJ\URJDLQLVFKDQJHGZLWK
a switch (SF) irrespective of condition.
Generally, gain is interlocked with condition
and changes a rate.
How to change two rates in the same
condition here.
1. Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
2. Move the cursor to the [COND] item
and touch the RTN button to access the
selection screen. Select the [SW]. Touch the
RTN button to return to the cursor mode.
3. # number shows the present switch state. In
the state of # 1 a cursor is moved to [--] and
RTN is pushed.
4. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
top is turned ON.
5. [TYPE GY] and [RATE] of a state of "#1 SF
top"are set up.
6. It is a setup of "#2". Move the cursor to the
[#1] item and touch the RTN button to
access the selection screen. Select the [#2].
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
SF : Top = #1
●
The number
of a SW state
161
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
7. Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button.
8. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
bottom is turned ON. the RTN button.
9. [TYPE GY] and [RATE] of a state of "#2 SF
bottom"are set up.
,ISRVLWLRQVZLWFKLVFKRVHQWKH FKDQJHRIUDWHVFDQEH
performed.
&RPELQHGXVHRIWZRRUPRUHVZLWFKHVFDQQRWEHSHUIRUPHG
SF : Bottom = #2
●
The number
of a SW state
162
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
GOVERNOR mixing
:KHQXVLQJD)XWDED*9*<&*<
JRYHUQRUWKLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRVZLWFKWKH530
of the helicopter's rotor head. The rotor head speed
FDQEHVZLWFKHGZLWKHDFKFRQGLWLRQRUWKHVZLWFK
7KHJRYHUQRULVXVHGE\FRQQHFWLQJWKHJRYHUQRUVSHHG
VHWWLQJFKDQQHOWR&+LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ
*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,
connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor to
&+DQGVHWWKHVZLWFKWR&+*RYHUQRUDWWKH)XQFWLRQ
menu of the Linkage Menu.
Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--]
for [Governor] of the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.
ŏ Select [GOVERNOR] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN
button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
ŏ To next page
(Currently selected condition name)
ŏUnit display selection:
[]/[rpm]
ŏSetup screen selection
ŏACT/INH: INH (initial setting)
ŏFine tuning VR settings
ŏRPM adjustment
ŏCondition/Switch selection
Setting method
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [INH] item and touch the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.
7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV
Touch the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
 
When the Governor is changed from the
default inhibited (INH) state to the active
(ACT) state, the endpoint menu will be
displayed and it is possible to utilize the
endpoints for this given condition.
*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
:KHQFKDQJHGIURP,1+WR$&721WKHVHUYRWUDYHOLV
initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
:KHQRSHUDWLRQLVFKDQJHGWR,1+DWDOOFRQGLWLRQVWKH
servo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point is
initialized to 135.
 
Use the SensorTouch to scroll to either YES
(incorporate the default endpoints) or NO
(endpoints are not utilized. Press the Return
(RTN) button to conÀrm the selection made.
Ɣ530DGMXVWPHQW
Move the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rpm by scrolling the touch sensor.
Initial value: 50 (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110 (OFF,
700~3500rpm)
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKH
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
Ɣ8QLWGLSOD\VHOHFWLRQ
Move the cursor to the UNIT item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the unit by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Touch the RTN button to change the
operation mode and return to the cursor
mode.
163
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
Ɣ'LSOD\PRGHVHOHFWLRQ
:KHQ>USP@PRGHLVVHOHFWHGDERYHVHWWLQJWKHGLVSOD\
PRGHFDQEHVHOHFWHG
* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the
02'(LVFKDQJHG&DOLEUDWLRQVKRXOGEHSHUIRUPHG YLD
the governor.
,QRUGHUWR XVHWKH*RYHUQRUIXQFWLRQRIWKH);LWLV
necessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700 rpm mode.
 
When the MODE of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.
The chart below indicates the mode percentage and
the corresponding RPM.
MODE 0％ 50％ 100％ 110％
1000-2000rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm
1000-2500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm
1000-3500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm
700-2000rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm
700-2500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm
700-3500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm
Ɣ)LQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJV
Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the control.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
GHVFULSWLRQDWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO
Move the cursor to the rate item and touch
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the touch
sensor.
Initial value: 0 (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~20 (-200~200rpm)
:KHQWKH571EXWWRQLVWRXFKHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKH
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
<EXAMPLE>RPM rate is changed with a
switch (SF) irrespective of condition.
Generally, RPM rate is interlocked with
condition and changes a rate.
How to change two rates in the same
condition here.
1. Select [GOVERNOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by touching the RTN button.
2. Move the cursor to the [COND] item
and touch the RTN button to access the
selection screen. Select the [SW]. Touch the
RTN button to return to the cursor mode.
And [INH] is set to [ACT].
3. # number shows the present switch state. In
the state of # 1 a cursor is moved to [--] and
RTN is pushed.
4. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
top is turned ON.
5. [MODE] and [RATE] of a state of "#1 SF
top"are set up.
6. It is a setup of "#2". Move the cursor to
the [#1] item and touch the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
[#2]. Touch the RTN button to return to the
cursormode. And [INH] is set to [ACT].
SF : Top = #1
●
The number
of a SW state
164
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
7. Move the cursor to the [--] item and touch
the RTN button.
8. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
bottom is turned ON. the RTN button.
9. [MODE] and [RATE] of a state of "#2 SF
bottom"are set up.
,ISRVLWLRQVZLWFKLVFKRVHQUDWHFKDQJHVFDQEH
performed.
&RPELQHGXVHRIWZRRUPRUHVZLWFKHVFDQQRWEHSHUIRUPHG
SF : Bottom = #2
●
The number
of a SW state
Ɣ&$/EXWWRQ
This function transmits a reference signal from
the transmitter for setting the governor side
speed display. The governor and transmitter
set values (speed display) can be matched.
7KH&$/EXWWRQFDQRQO\EHGLVSOD\HGLQUSPPRGH
1. Move the cursor to the CAL button and
touch the RTN button.
2. The display switches to the screen
that transmits the reference signal.
3. Move the cursor to OFF and touch the
RTN button.
4. Once it scrolls to the mode of your
choice, touch the RTN button.
5. Set the transmitter's displayed speed.
Adjust the governor's speed display
on its side. (Refer to your governor's
instruction manual on how to make
proper adjustments).
Button added to the reference signal output
screen. (Displayed only in the rpm mode.)
In "ON", "CAL" appears
165
<Appendix>
ŏ Select the function name
and return to the home
screen by touching the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<SensorTouch™>
RETURN
TIMER ST1/ST2
Timer setting
The Timer function may be set for any desired
time, i.e. engine run time, specified times for
competitions, etc. Two independent timers are
provided for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaning that
when you switch between model setups, the timer
associated with the new model is brought up
automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stop from the
motion of any switch or stick. You may set the ON and
OFF directions freely. Each timer has a capacity of up
to 59 minutes 59 seconds.
Each timer may be set for count-down (DOWN
mode) or count up (UP mode) operation with a
target time or for count up to 99 hours 59 minutes
(HOUR mode).
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set
time, a buzzer sound for each count is generated.
Countdown timers sound one short beep during
the last twenty seconds and two short beeps during
the last ten seconds before reaching the target, then
a long tone at the target time, and continue counting
with displaying a minus (-) sign. Count-up timers
also beep the last twenty and ten seconds, beep the
target time, and keep counting upwards until shut
down.
A mode which sounds an alarm each minute of
the time remaining up to the timer alarm time can
be selected.
The HOUR mode is convenient when used in
engine maintenance period and other long-term
measurements.
* When the HOUR mode is set, "xx (hour): xx (minute)"
is displayed on the count time display. Seconds are not
displayed.
* When the HOUR mode is set, ":" blinks each second during
timer operation.
* When the HOUR mode is set, the alarm function is
inhibited.
ŏ Select ST1 or ST2 at the home screen and
call the setup screen shown below by
touching the RTN button.
Scrolling
ŏ Moving cursor
ŏ Selecting mode
ŏ Adjusting value
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
166
<Appendix>
Timer setting
Ɣ8SWLPHUGRZQWLPHUVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the mode by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button.
[UP]: Up timer
[DOWN]: Down timer
[HOUR]: Hour mode timer
Ɣ7LPHUWLPHVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [ALARM] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Set the time by scrolling the touch sensor.
[00]:[00]:[min]:[sec]
Touch the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Ɣ6ZLWFKVHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the item of the switch you
want to set, access the switch setup screen
by touching the RTN button. Select the switch
and ON direction.
[For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] located on the next page.]
[START]: Start switch
[STOP]: Stop switch
[RESET]: Reset switch
Ɣ0HPRU\VHWWLQJ
Move the cursor to the [MEMORY] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the mode by scrolling the touch sensor
and touch the RTN button.
[OFF]: Memory function OFF
[ON]: Mode where the timer is not reset when
turned power off and switched the model.
Ɣ$PRGHZKLFKVRXQGVDQDODUPHDFKPLQXWH
FDQEHVHOHFWHG
Change the setting using the "
Ç
" button (or
"
È
" button).
"
Ç
": Alarm sounds each minute of the time
elapsed from timer start. (Conventional
mode)
"
È
": Alarm sounds each minute of the time
remaining up to the alarm time.
7LPHURSHUDWLRQ
ŏ Timer ST1 and ST2 are started/stopped by
pre-selected start/stop switch.
ŏ To reset a timer, operate the pre-selected
reset switch, or move the cursor to the [RESET]
display on the timer screen and touch the
RTN button.
167
<Appendix>
The various functions used in the FX-22 can
be activated by a switch. For the purposes of this
manual, a stick position, VR position, etc. shall be
commonly referred to as a switch in all cases. That
(Switch selection screen example)
:KHQVZLWFKLVVHOHFWHG
When switch was selected, ON/OFF position
setting is also performed.
*The ON/OFF setting state of each position is displayed.
1. When you want to change the ON/OFF
setting, use the touch sensor to move the
cursor and touch the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Switch the ON/
Off display by scrolling the touch sensor.
*ON/OFF display blinks.
2. When the RTN button is touched, the ON/
OFF setting is changed. (Touch the S1
button to stop the change.)
3. To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of
the screen and touch the RTN button.
:KHQVWLFNWULPOHYHURUNQREVHOHFWHG
When a stick, trim lever, or knob is used as a
switch, two operation modes can be selected:
1. When you want to change the mode,
move the cursor to [MODE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Switch the display
to the mode you want to change by
scrolling the touch sensor and then make
the change by touching the RTN button.
ŏ
Mode: [LIN]/[SYM]
*
Set the ON/Off point by the method described on the next page.
6ZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
1. Use the touch sensor to move the cursor
(highlights) to the switch you want to
select and touch the RTN button.
*The switch blinks.
2. To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [H/W SELECT] at the top
of the screen and touch the RTN button.
Or, move the cursor to the [ON/OFF] and
call the ON/OFF position setting screen by
touching the RTN button.
$OWHUQDWHPRGHVHWWLQJ
ŏALTERNATE
mode: [OFF]/[ON]
1. Move the cursor to the [ALTERNATE] item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2. Change to the mode you want to set by
scrolling the touch sensor.
*The mode display blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button. (Touch the S1 button
to stop the change.)
4. To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of the
screen and touch the RTN button.
6ZLWFK6HWWLQJ0HWKRG
6ZLWFKVHOHFWLRQ
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.
is, whenever the manual indicates that something is
operated via a switch, it is possible for the user to
activate this setting via a stick, stick position, etc.
168
<Appendix>
2SHUDWLRQPRGHV
The operation modes available when stick, trim
lever, or knob was selected are described below.
/LQHDUPRGH>/,1@
This mode sets ON/OFF to the left or right (up
or down) with the set point as the reference.
6\PPHWULFDOPRGH>6<0@
Left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical near the neutral position. For instance,
when you want to switch D/R with the aileron
stick, when the stick is moved to the left or right,
DR can be turned on at the same position.
6KLIWLQJWKH212IISRLQW
The ON/OFF point can be shifted. ON/OFF at
a free position can be changed.
ŏBlack range: OFF range
ŏWhite range: ON range
[Setting method]
1. First, use the touch sensor to move the
cursor to the [POS] item.
2. Move the stick, trim lever, or knob to the
point you want to change and touch the
RTN button. The point is shifted.
3. To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of
the screen and touch the RTN button.
169
<Appendix>
/RJLFPRGH
AND: When both switches are ON, the
condition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are in
different states, the condition is ON.
6ZLWFKPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the [SINGLE] item and
touch the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2. Select the [LOGIC] by scrolling the touch
sensor.
*[LOGIC] display blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button to change to the
logic switch mode.
(Logic switch setting screen)
/RJLFPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Move the cursor to the logic mode item
and touch the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2. Select the logic mode by scrolling the
touch sensor. [AND, OR or EX-OR]
*The mode display blinks.
3. Touch the RTN button to change to the
logic mode.
6ZLFKVHOHFWLRQ
1. Select the right and left switch respectively.
(Refer to the description at the previous
page.)
To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [SWITCH] at the top of the
screen and touch the RTN button.
/RJLFVZLWFK&RQGLWLRQ6HOHFWIXQFWLRQRQO\
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches.
170
<Appendix>
[Updating procedure]
ŔőŃŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃƉƒƕƐƄƗ
<RXZLOOrUVWZDQWWRIRUPDW\RXU6'FDUGWRWKH);,I\RXDUHXVLQJDQH[LVWLQJ6'FDUGDQ\
GDWDSUHYLRXVO\VDYHGWRLWZLOOEHGHOHWHGGXULQJWKHIRUPDW:HVXJJHVW\RXHLWKHUVDYHWKLV
GDWDRQ\RXUFRPSXWHURUSXUFKDVHDQHZFDUG
$IWHULQVHUWLQJWKHQHZ6'FDUGLQWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHUWXUQRQWKHSRZHU
VZLWFK<RXZLOOVHHWKHZRUG)250$7LI\RXKDYHQRWSUHYLRXVO\XVHG
WKLVFDUGLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
3OHDVHVHOHFW<(6DQGWRXFKn571|
7KHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HGGXULQJ
IRUPDWWLQJ
:KHQWKHIRUPDWLVFRPSOHWHGWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG
7XUQRíWKHSRZHUVZLWFKDQGUHPRYHWKH6'FDUGIURPLWVVORW
ŕőŃųƕƈƓƄƕƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƖƒƉƗƚƄƕƈŃƘƓƇƄƗƈŃƆƄƕƇő
3OHDVHXQ]LSWKH]LSSHGrOH7KHIROORZLQJrOHVZLOOEHFUHDWHG
؞7VJ8SGDWHH[H)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\
؞7VJ8SGDWHGDW,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ8SGDWHH[H
؞76*B83'$7(GDWؼ,GHQWLrHGrOHRI76*
؞76*B76ELQ8SGDWHrOHRI76*SLHFH
؞76*B$3ELQ8SGDWHrOHRI76*SLHFH
؞76*B83/'ELQ8SGDWHrOHRI76*SLHFH
83'$7,1*
Your Futaba FX-22 transmitter programming can be updated easily online. When functions are added or
LPSURYHGWKHXSGDWH¿OHFDQEHGRZQORDGHGIURPRXUZHEVLWH&RS\WKHXSGDWH¿OHVWRWKH6'FDUGDQGWKHQ
use the following procedure to update the program.
Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.
,QVHUWWKHIRUPDWWHG6'FDUGLQWRDFDUGUHDGHULQ\RXU3&
3OHDVHUXQ7VJ8SGDWHH[H
171
<Appendix>
6HOHFWWKHGULYHWKDW\RXUFDUGUHDGHULVDVVLJQHGWRLQ\RXU
3&
$IWHUWKH8SGDWHrOHVDUHFRSLHGWRWKH6'FDUGWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQVDUHGLVSOD\HG
&OLFNWKH(QGEXWWRQ
Update
ŖőŃŸƓƇƄƗƈŃƖƒƉƗƚƄƕƈŃƒƉŃũŻŐŕŕŃ
3OHDVHLQVHUWWKH6'FDUGZKLFKLQFOXGHVWKHXSGDWHrOH
3XVKWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQ
:KLOHVWLOOKROGLQJWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQSRZHURQWKH
WUDQVPLWWHU
$IWHUDIHZVHFRQGVWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG
3XVKWKH80(18021EXWWRQIRUWKUHHVHFRQGV7KH
VRIWZDUHXSGDWHZLOOEHJLQ
:KHQWKHXSGDWHLVFRPSOHWHWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG7XUQRí
WKHSRZHUVZLWFK
5HPRYHWKH6'FDUG
3OHDVHFKHFNWKHVRIWZDUHYHUVLRQDW,1)2LQ6<67(0PHQX
PROGRAM UPDATE
START : PUSH MON . 3SEC
PROGRAM UPDATE
UP LOADING
PROGRAM UPDATE
COMPLETED
X.X
172
<Appendix>
,QVWDOOLQJ6SHHFK'DWD
There are three language versions, English, German, and Japanese, in speech data. It is possible to install
only one language.
,I\RXLQVWDOODVHFRQGODQJXDJHLWZLOORYHUULGHWKH¿UVWRQHWKDW\RXLQVWDOOHG
[Installing procedure]
ŔőŃŰƄƎƌƑƊŃƒƉŃƆƄƕƇŃƉƒƕŃƌƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŃƖƓƈƈƆƋŃƇƄƗƄ
3OHDVHXQ]LSWKH]LSSHGrOH7KHIROORZLQJrOHVZLOOEHFUHDWHG
(QJOLVK9HUVLRQ
؞7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H

)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\
؞7VJ8SGDWHGDW
,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H
؞76*B,167$//B6281'GDWؼ,GHQWLrHGrOH
؞7VJ6SHHFK(QJELQ

'DWDrOHSLHFH
؞7VJ6SHHFK(QJELQ

'DWDrOHSLHFH
؞7VJ6SHHFK(QJELQ

'DWDrOHSLHFH
*HUPDQ9HUVLRQ
؞7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H

)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\
؞7VJ8SGDWHGDW
,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H
؞76*B,167$//B6281'GDWؼ,GHQWLrHGrOH
؞7VJ6SHHFK*HUELQ'DWDrOHSLHFH
؞7VJ6SHHFK*HUELQ'DWDrOHSLHFH
؞7VJ6SHHFK*HUELQ'DWDrOHSLHFH
-DSDQHVH9HUVLRQ
؞7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H

)LOHFRS\XWLOLW\
؞7VJ8SGDWHGDW
,QIRUPDWLRQrOHIRU7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQG(QJH[H
؞76*B,167$//B6281'GDWؼ,GHQWLrHGrOH
؞7VJ6SHHFK-SQELQ

'DWDrOHSLHFH
؞7VJ6SHHFK-SQELQ

'DWDrOHSLHFH
؞7VJ6SHHFK-SQELQ

'DWDrOHSLHFH
,QVWDOOWKHDOUHDG\IRUPDWWHG6'FDUGLQWR\RXU3&VFDUGUHDGHU
3OHDVHUXQ7VJ,QVWDOO6RXQGH[H
173
<Appendix>
6HOHFWWKHGULYHWKDW\RXUFDUGUHDGHULVDVVLJQHGWRLQ\RXU
3&&OLFN2.
$IWHUWKH8SGDWHrOHVDUHFRSLHGWRWKH6'FDUGWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQVDUHGLVSOD\HG&OLFNWKH(QG
EXWWRQ
Update
ŕőŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏŃƖƓƈƈƆƋŃƇƄƗƄŃƒƉŃũŻŐŕŕŃ
3OHDVHLQVHUWWKH6'FDUGZKLFKLQFOXGHVWKHLQVWDOOLQJVSHHFKGDWD
3XVKWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQ
6WLOOKROGLQJWKH+20((;,7EXWWRQSRZHURQWKH
WUDQVPLWWHU
$IWHUDIHZVHFRQGVWKHIROORZLQJVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG
3UHVVWKH80(18021EXWWRQIRUWKUHHVHFRQGV7KHVSHHFKGDWD
EHJLQVWRLQVWDOO
$IWHUDERXWVHFRQGVXSORDGLQJUHDFKHVWKHULJKWRIWKHSURJUHVVEDU
DQGWKHQEHJLQVDJDLQDIWHUDSDXVH
7KHXSORDGLQJPD\DSSHDUWRSURJUHVVVORZO\
7KHSURJUHVVEDUZLOODJDLQXSORDG7KLVFDQWDNHDIHZPLQXWHV$ERXW
PLQ
$QGn&203/(7('|LVGLVSOD\HG3OHDVHWXUQRíWKHSRZHU
'RQWWXUQRíWKHSRZHUEHIRUH&203/(7('LVGLVSOD\HG
3OHDVHGHWDFK6'FDUG
3OHDVHFKHFNWKHODQJXDJHDW7(/(06(7PHQXLQ/,1.$*(PHQX
INSTALLSOUND
START : PUSH MON . 3SEC
INSTALLSOUND
INSTALLING
INSTALLSOUND
INSTALLING
INSTALLSOUND
INSTALLSOUND
COMPLETED
174
<Appendix>
FUTABA CORPORATION Phone: +81 475 32 6982, Facsimile: +81 475 32 6983
1080 Yabutsuka, Chosei-mura, Chosei-gun, Chiba-ken, 299-4395, Japan
©FUTABA CORPORATION 2013, 9 (1)
… 42 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Futaba FX22 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Futaba FX22 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 4,63 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info